Page 1: Service Manual
SERVICE MANUAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS e-STUDIO4500c/5500c File No. SME060023C0 R060621C2200-TTEC Ver03_2007-04...
Page 2 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the information contained herein.
Page 3 1. CONVENTIONS Conventions Used in this Manual This manual uses several symbols. Symbol What it means Refer to section number See Core Tech Manual for details Screw Connector E-ring Clip ring Clamp Sideways, LEF Lengthwise, SEF (Long Edge Feed) (Short Edge Feed) Cautions, Notes, etc.
Page 4 Commonly Used Terms In the SP tables, the finishers are referred to by number, and some devices that appear in the SP tables are not supported overseas: Finisher 1 3000/2000-Sheet Finisher B700/B701. The B700 supports corner stapling, booklet stapling and booklet folding. The B701 supports corner stapling only. Finisher 2 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.
Page 5 2. GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this manual handy for future reference. Safety Information Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product. Safety During Operation In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used. WARNING A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation.
Page 6 2.1 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE SERVICE ENGINEER 2.1.1 SERVICE ENGINEER Maintenance shall be done only by trained service engineers who have completed service training for the machine and all optional devices designed for use with the machine. 2.1.2 REFERENCE MATERIAL FOR MAINTENANCE Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials (service manuals, technical bulletins, operating instructions, and safety guidelines for service...
Page 7 2.2 BEFORE INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE 2.2.1 SHIPPING AND MOVING THE MACHINE CAUTION 1. Work carefully when lifting or moving the machine. If the machine is heavy, two or more service engineers may be required to prevent injuries (muscle strains, spinal injuries, etc.) or damage to the machine if it is dropped or tipped over.
Page 8 2.2.3 INSTALLATION, DISASSEMBLY, AND ADJUSTMENTS CAUTION 1. After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the machine to make sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all shipping materials, protective materials, wires and tags, metal brackets, etc., removed for installation, have been removed and that no tools remain inside the machine.
Page 9: During Maintenance
2.3 DURING MAINTENANCE 2.3.1 GENERAL CAUTION 1. Before you begin a maintenance procedure: Switch the machine off. Disconnect the power plug from the power source. Allow the machine to cool for at least 10 minutes. 2. Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot surfaces.
Page 10: Ozone Filters
2.3.3 ORGANIC CLEANERS CAUTION 1. During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol, etc.) other than those described in the service manual. 2. Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use organic solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and becoming nauseous.
Page 11 2.3.6 POWER PLUG AND POWER CORD WARNING 1. Before serving the machine (especially when responding to a service call), always make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the power source. A partially inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to a power surge caused by high resistance) and cause a fire or other problems.
Page 12 2.4 AFTER INSTALLATION, SERVICING 2.4.1 DISPOSAL OF USED ITEMS WARNING Never incinerate used toner or toner cartridges. Toner or toner cartridges thrown into a fire can ignite or explode and cause serious injury. At the work site always carefully wrap used toner and toner cartridges with plastic bags to avoid spillage before disposal or removal.
Page 13 2.4.2 POINTS TO CONFIRM WITH OPERATORS At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the machine. Emphasize the following points. Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor problems by following the procedures described in the operating instructions. Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to remove.
Page 14 2.5 SPECIAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR TONER This section describes information for users in regard to the use of toner. 2.6 ACCIDENTAL PHYSICAL EXPOSURE CAUTION 1. Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to avoid spilling toner on clothing or the hands. 2.
Page 15 2.8 TONER DISPOSAL WARNING 1. Never attempt to incinerate toner, used toner, or empty toner containers (bottles or cartridges). Burning toner can explode and scatter, causing serious burns. 2. Always wrap used toner and empty toner bottles and cartridges in plastic bags to avoid spillage.
Page 16: Important Safety Notices
2.8.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THIS MACHINE IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY 1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. 2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. 3.
Page 17: Laser Safety
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL 1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an open flame. 2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) 3.
Page 18 WARNING 1. Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc.
Page 19: Table Of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INSTALLATION ................1-1 1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............1-1 1.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ............1-1 1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ................1-2 1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS..........1-3 1.1.4 DIMENSIONS ...................1-4 1.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............1-5 1.2 COPIER AND PERIPHERALS ..............1-6 1.3 COPIER e-STUD4500c/5500c..............1-7 1.3.1 ACCESSORIES ................1-7 1.3.2 INSTALLATION ................1-8 Tapes and packing material ..............1-8 Shipping Retainer Removal ..............1-12...
Page 20 1.6.2 INSTALLATION ................1-51 Removing Tape and Accessories............1-51 LCT Adapter (B699) Installation............1-52 LCT Installation ...................1-53 LCT (B473): Paper size change from A4 to 8 1/2” x 11” (LT) .....1-56 1.7 8 1/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474) ..........1-59 1.7.1 ACCESSORIES ................1-59 1.7.2 INSTALLATION ................1-60 LCT Connected to the Machine ............1-60 1.8 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)..........1-63...
Page 21 1.14 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) ..........1-103 1.14.1 ACCESSORIES ................1-102 1.14.2 INSTALLATION ................1-104 Removing Tapes and Packing Materials...........1-104 Preparing the Finisher (B700/B701/B706) ........1-105 Attaching the Extensions for the B706 ..........1-106 Attaching the Extensions for the B700/B701........1-109 Attaching the Interposer Tray (B700/B701/B706) ......1-110 Attaching the Corner Plates for the B706..........1-111 Docking Finisher/Interposer with the Machine (B700/B701/B706) ..1-113 1.15 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS............1-115...
Page 22 2.3.2 2000/3000-SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER B700/B701....2-11 2.3.3 PUNCH B702..................2-11 2.3.4 3000-SHEET FINISHER B706............2-11 2.3.5 PUNCH B531..................2-11 2.3.6 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704 ..........2-12 2.3.7 LCT B473..................2-12 2.4 LUBRICATION POINTS ................2-13 2.4.1 COPIER ..................2-13 OPC, ITB Replacement...............2-13 Fusing Unit..................2-14 3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........3-1 3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS ................3-1 3.1.1 DRUM ....................3-1 3.1.2 PCU ....................3-1...
Page 23 3.4.1 CAUTION DECALS ................3-34 3.4.2 POLYGON MOTOR................3-35 3.4.3 LASER UNIT...................3-36 Adjustments After Laser Unit Replacement ........3-39 3.4.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR........3-40 3.5 PCU (POTO CONDUCTOR UNITS) ............3-41 3.5.1 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT ............3-41 3.5.2 DEVELOPMENT GEARS ...............3-49 3.5.3 CHARGE ROLLER UNIT..............3-50 3.5.4 DRUM AND CLEANING BLADE.............3-51 Removing the OPC Drum ..............3-51 Removing the Cleaning Blade.............3-52 3.5.5 PCU CLEANING UNIT..............3-54...
Page 24 3.9.5 FUSING CLEANING UNIT..............3-90 3.9.6 FUSING BELT THERMOSTATS ............3-91 3.9.7 FUSING THERMISTORS, HEATING ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSOR..............3-92 3.9.8 FUSING BELT LUBRICATION ROLLER, CLEANING ROLLER ..3-93 3.9.9 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING FELT ROLLER......3-94 3.9.10 HOT ROLLER, HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMPS ....3-96 3.9.11 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP..........3-98 3.9.12 HEATING ROLLER, FUSING BELT, HOT ROLLER ....3-99 3.9.13 PRESSURE ROLLER..............3-102 3.9.14 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER ..........3-103...
Page 25 3.14.7 HVPS, PFC BOARD ..............3-140 3.14.8 PSU ....................3-141 3.14.9 AC DRIVE BOARD ..............3-142 3.14.10 TRANSFER MOTOR, DRIVE, DRIVE MOTOR BOARDS ..3-143 3.15 HDD UNIT....................3-144 Disposal of HDD Units ..............3-145 Reinstallation ..................3-145 3.16 MOTORS .....................3-146 3.16.1 PCU MOTOR, DRUM MOTOR ...........3-146 3.16.2 PAPER TRANSFER MOTOR .............3-148 3.16.3 IMAGE TRANSFER MOTOR............3-149 3.16.4 WASTE TONER TRANSPORT MOTOR, WASTE TONER...
Page 26 3.19.2 ARDF ..................3-179 ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration......3-179 3.19.3 REGISTRATION .................3-180 Image Area ..................3-180 Leading Edge..................3-180 Side to Side..................3-180 Adjustment Standards...............3-180 Paper Registration Standard.............3-180 Adjustment Procedure...............3-181 3.19.4 COLOR REGISTRATION ............3-182 Forced MUSIC Adjustment ...............3-182 Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper........3-182 Color Registration Test and Error Adjustment........3-182 3.19.5 SKEW ADJUSTMENT AFTER LASER UNIT REPLACEMENT..3-183 3.19.6 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION..........3-185...
Page 27 4.3.3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS............4-27 SC codes Group 1: Scanning..............4-28 SC codes Group 2: Exposure .............4-30 SC codes Group 3: Image Development - 1 ........4-37 SC codes Group 4: Image Development - 2 ........4-42 SC codes Group 5: Paper Feed............4-47 SC codes Group 6: Device Communication........4-55 SC codes Group 7: Peripherals ............4-58 SC800: Overall System...............4-65 SC900: Miscellaneous ................4-71...
Page 28 4.4.8 LOW PAWER MODE TEMPERATURE ..........4-92 SYMPTOM: ..................4-92 CAUSE: ....................4-92 ACTION: ....................4-92 4.4.9 POOR FUSING ON 100g/m PAPER ..........4-94 SYMPTOM: ..................4-94 CAUSE: ....................4-94 SOLUTION: ..................4-94 ACTION: ....................4-94 IMPORTANT: ..................4-94 Final Solution: Middle Thickness Paper Mode ........4-95 APPENDIX: ..................4-99 4.4.10 ABNORMAL SHIFT TRAY MOVEMENT OF SR842 (B706) WITH EFI PRINTER CONTROLLER (E-7000) ........4-100 SYMPTOM: ..................4-100 CAUSE: ....................4-100...
Page 29 5.2.2 SOFTWARE AND SETTING RESET..........5-8 Software Reset ..................5-8 Resetting the User Tool Settings ............5-8 Resetting Copy/Document Server Features Only .........5-8 Resetting Scanner Features Only ............5-8 5.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING..............5-9 5.3.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2109 002 ........5-9 Test Pattern Table.................5-9 5.3.2 IPU TEST PATTERNS: SP4417 .............5-10 5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE................5-11 5.4.1 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE ..........5-11 Firmware Update Procedure ...............5-12...
Page 30 5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY .........5-212 5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES ............5-213 SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key .....5-213 SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ......5-213 SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log.....5-213 5.11 USER TOOLS..................5-214 5.11.1 OVERVIEW ................5-214 5.11.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS ..............5-215...
Page 31 6.5.5 DUST DETECTION ................6-36 Overview .....................6-36 What Happens if Dust is Detected? ............6-37 How is the Dust Detected?..............6-38 The Effects of SP Mode Settings on Dust Detection......6-39 6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING ................6-40 6.6.1 OVERVIEW ..................6-40 6.6.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT)............6-41 SBU.....................6-41 Operation Summary ................6-41 Storing Operation Settings ..............6-41 SBU Test Mode...................6-41...
Page 32 6.10.2 WASTE TONER UNIT MOTORS..........6-72 6.10.3 WASTE TONER COLLECTION UNIT SENSORS ......6-73 Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor............6-73 Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full Sensor ..........6-74 Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor ............6-74 Waste Toner Bottle Lock Sensor ............6-74 Waste Toner Bottle Transport Motor ...........6-74 6.11 PROCESS CONTROL................6-75 6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................6-75 6.11.2 COMPONENTS USED DURING PROCESS CONTROL .....6-76...
Page 33 Connecting the Left and Right Sides of the Tray.......6-115 Paper Lift/Remaining Paper Detection ..........6-116 Fence Drive..................6-118 Rear Fence Drive ................6-119 Tray Side-to-side Positioning ............6-120 6.13.9 TRAY POSITIONING MECHANISM – TRAYS 1 TO 3 ....6-121 6.13.10 BYPASS TRAY .................6-122 Bypass Feed and Separation............6-122 Bypass Tray Paper End Detection ............6-123 Bypass Paper Size Detection............6-124 6.13.11 PAPER REGISTRATION............6-126...
Page 34 3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS..........B331-4 3.1 SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION ...B331-4LCT (LARGE CAPACITY TRAY) 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......... B473-1 1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS................B473-1 1.2 PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS ......... B473-2 1.3 PICK-UP SOLENOID................B473-3 1.4 PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES ....... B473-4 1.5 TRAY MOTOR..................B473-5 1.6 PAPER STACK SENSOR..............
Page 35 1.16 BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR ....B700-22 1) 1.16.1 BOOKLET STAPLER............. B700-22 2) 1.16.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR ..........B700-23 1. 2. DETAILS................ B700-24 2.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................. B700-24 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ............B700-26 1) 2.2.1 UPPER AREA B700/B701 ............B700-26 2) 2.2.2 LOWER AREA B700/B701 ............
Page 36 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......... B704-1 1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS................. B704-1 1.2 FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER ..........B704-2 1.3 FEED BELT ..................B704-3 1.4 GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT ............B704-4 1.5 MAIN BOARD ..................B704-5 1.6 MOTOR REPLACEMENT..............B704-6 1.16.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR ..........
Page 37 3.5 SENSORS ..................B706-11 3.5.1 STACK HEIGHT 1, 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR ..B706-11 Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2............B706-11 Exit Guide Open Sensor .............. B706-11 3.5.2 UPPER TRAY PAPER LIMIT AND EXIT SENSOR ....B706-12 Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor............ B706-12 Upper Tray Exit Sensor..............
Page 38 6.6 FEED-OUT ..................B706-40 6.7 PAPER EXIT STACKING ..............B706-41 6.8 SHIFT TRAY..................B706-42 6.8.1 OVERVIEW ................B706-42 Stand-by Mode................B706-42 6.8.2 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MOVEMENT ........B706-43 Sort/Stack Mode (Shift Mode) ............B706-43 Staple Mode................. B706-43 6.8.3 SHIFT TRAY LOWER LIMIT DETECTION ....... B706-44 6.9 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT ........
Page 39 SPECIFICATIONS ..............SPEC-1 1. MAINFRAME ..................SPEC-1 1.1 COPYING ..................SPEC-1 Paper Sizes...................SPEC-3 1.2 PRINTING..................SPEC-4 1.3 SCANNER ...................SPEC-5 2. ARDF ....................SPEC-6 3. OPTIONAL PERIPHERALS..............SPEC-7 3.1 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B473..........SPEC-7 3.2 8½ X 14" PAPER SIZE TRAY B474 ..........SPEC-7 3.3 9-BIN MAILBOX B762 ..............SPEC-8 3.4 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704 ..........SPEC-8 3.5 3000-SHEET FINISHER B706.............SPEC-9 3.6 PUNCH UNIT B531 ..............SPEC-10...
Page 40: Installation
August, 2006 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1. INSTALLATION 1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT 1. Temperature Range: Recommended Temp.: 23 C (73.4 ) Allowed Temp.: 10 C to 32 C (50 F to 90 F) * 2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% Rh 3.
Page 41: Machine Level
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS August, 2006 6. If the installation area has air-conditioners or heaters, put the machine in a location that agrees with these conditions: a) Where there are no sudden temperature changes from low to high, or high to low. b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in the summer.
Page 42: Minimum Space Requirements
August, 2006 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS Put the copier near the power source. Minimum clearance must be as shown below. The same amount of clearance is necessary when optional peripheral devices are installed. 0 mm Rear 160 mm (6.3") 110 mm (4.3") Right Left 750 mm (29.5") Front...
Page 43: Dimensions
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS August, 2006 1.1.4 DIMENSIONS 480 mm (18.9") 480 mm (18.9") 1,198 mm (43.2") 1,230 mm (48.4") 1,014 mm (39.9") 90 mm (3.5") 657 mm (25.9") 750 mm (29.5") 354 mm (13.9") B132I112.WMF 850 mm (33.5") 613 mm (24.1") 458 mm (18") B132I113.WMF...
Page 44: Power Requirements
August, 2006 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS WARNING! 1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and that you can get access to it easily. Make sure the plug is tightly connected to the outlet. 2. Do not connect more than one electrical device to the same power outlet.
Page 45: Copier And Peripherals
1.2 COPIER AND PERIPHERALS B132I116.WMF This is a list of the peripheral devices that can be installed with the copier. Model Name Comments B132 e-STUDIO4500c Main machine (Copier) B200 e-STUDIO5500c B756 Copy Tray Type 2075 Attached to main machine B473...
Page 46: Accessories
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C 1.3 COPIER e-STUDIO4500c/5500c 1.3.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Q’ty 1. Instructions Pocket.............. 1 2. Exposure glass cloth holder..........1 3. Exposure glass cloth............1 4. Leveling Shoes ..............4 5.
Page 47: Copier E-Stud4500C/5500C
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 1.3.2 INSTALLATION Note Tapes and packing material B132I910A.MWF B132I703.WMF B132I004.WMF WARNING! Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do these procedures. Note Be sure to place slanted support [G] made of cardboard with its hard side [H] up when unloading the copier from the pallet using it.
Page 48 August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C B132I002.WMF [A]: Under ARDF [B]: Operation panel film...
Page 49 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 B132I005.WMF 1. Open the front door and, and remove the transfer belt release lever [A] (1 tape). We will install this in the correct location later. Important [B], [C], O NOT TOUCH AT THIS TIME HESE ITEMS ARE REMOVED AFTER YOU...
Page 50 August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C B132I102.WMF 2. From Tray 1 remove: [A]: Block, tape [B]: Retainer, tag, wire ( 3. Remove all retainers and accessories from Trays 2, Tray 3. 1-11...
Page 51: Shipping Retainer Removal
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 Shipping Retainer Removal B132I006A.WMF 1. Prepare an open space on the floor for the hopper. 2. Remove the screws of the toner hopper cover [A] ( x 3). 3. Put your hands under the left and right corners of the toner hopper, and slowly pull it out on its rails until it stops.
Page 52 August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C B132I715.WMF B132I902.WMFF 8. Remove the tag, and rod [A] ( x 1). 9. Disconnect the fan connector [B]. 10. Remove the face plate [C] ( x 5). 11. Put the PCU stand [D] on a flat, clean surface.
Page 53 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 B132I723.WMF Important: O NOT TRY TO PULL OUT THE DRAWER UNIT UNTIL AFTER YOU REMOVE THE FOLLOWING RETAINERS 13. Remove the tape [A]. 14. Pull on the reinforced part [B] on tag [C] to remove the stabilizing rod [D].
Page 54: Developer Cartridge Installation
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Developer Cartridge Installation B132I903.WMF B132R214.WMF Important The OPC drum is exposed on the bottom of the PCU. Do not put your hand under the PCU when you hold the PCU. Always use the PCU stand. Do not put the PCU on other surfaces.
Page 55 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 B132R210.WMF 5. On the front end of the PCU, remove the shaft cap [A] and lock plate [B] ( x 3). Important: After you remove the shaft cap, make sure that you do not turn the shaft [C] of the development roller.
Page 56 August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C B132I105.WMF B132I105A.WMF 8. Place the development unit [A] on a clean sheet of A3/DLT paper [B]. 9. Remove the screws from the dummy cartridge [B] ( x 2). 10. With a fingernail, release the tabs on the left [C] and right [D].
Page 57 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 B132I106.WMF B132I106A.WMF 13. Thread the film seal [A] through hole [B]. 14. Slide the developer cartridge down [C] on the left so the holes and tabs [D] are aligned. 15. Press in on the middle of the developer cartridge [E] to lock the tabs inside [F].
Page 58 August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C B132I106B.WMF B132I106C.WMF 17. Check the following to points to be sure that the developer cartridge is set properly. Tabs [A] and [B] should be locked. The developer cartridge edge [C] should be flat and not bulging or floating...
Page 59: Reassemble The Pcu
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 B132R222.WMF Reassemble the PCU 1. Attach the shaft cap [A]. If you cannot attach the cap, then check the end of the development roller shaft [B]. The flat side of the shaft must point up and must be level.
Page 60 August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C B132I114.WMF 3. Hold the PCU [A] in front of the slot where you removed it. 4. Engage the rails [B] with the slots in the sides of the PCU. 5. Slowly push the PCU into the slot. Make sure the tab [C] above the PCU is locked.
Page 61: Reattach The Face Plate
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 Reattach the Face Plate B132I716.WMF 1. Attach the face plate [A] with the screws in the sequence shown by the numbers above ( x 5). Important: Do not tighten these screws too much. Make sure the fan connector [B] is not pinched behind the face plate.
Page 62: Remove The Retainers In The Drawer Unit
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Remove the Retainers in the Drawer Unit B132I709.WMF 1. Turn the lever [A] counter-clockwise, and pull the drawer unit [B] out of the machine until it stops. 2. Remove the instruction sheets [C] and [D]. 3. Remove the bracket and tag [E] at the rear.
Page 63 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 B132I722.WMF 5. Raise lever D2 [A]. 6. Turn knob D1 [B] in the direction shown by the arrow. 7. Remove protective sheet [C]. 8. Lower lever D2 [A]. 9. Push the drawer into the machine until it stops.
Page 64 August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C B132I707.WMF 11. Locate the transfer belt release lever [A]. It was removed earlier with the shipping tape. 12. Attach the transfer belt release lever. 13. Turn it to the vertical position and make sure that it locks.
Page 65: Reinstall The Toner Hopper
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 Reinstall the Toner Hopper B132I006.WMF 1. Make sure that the transfer belt release lever [A] is up and locked before you attach the hopper. 2. Pull the toner hopper left rail [B] and right rail [C] until they are fully extended.
Page 66: Stc (Soft Toner Cartridge) Installation
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C STC (Soft Toner Cartridge) Installation Important: Make sure that you install each STC in the correct bin. The label on the toner cartridge must face the front of the machine. From left to right, the bins are for Yellow...
Page 67: Make The Machine Level
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 Make the Machine Level B132I717.WMF 1. Attach the leveling shoes [A] to the machine. 2. Place a level on the exposure glass. 3. Use a wrench to lift or lower the nuts [B] on the leveling shoes until the machine is less than 5 mm from level (measure it from front to rear and from left to right).
Page 68: Attach The Pcu Stand Rack
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Attach the PCU Stand Rack B132I718.WMF 1. Hold the PCU stand rack [A] with its open end pointed as shown, and put it below the machine. 2. Attach the rack to the bottom of the machine with the magnets on the rack.
Page 69: Attach Decals
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 Attach Decals Front Set 1. Attach the paper-installation decals to the trays. These tell you how to add new paper. Front set decal: Attach this decal to the LCT if it is installed. ‘Front set’ Back Set B132I910.BMP...
Page 70: Initializing Developer And Toner
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Initializing Developer and Toner 1. At the left rear corner of the machine, make sure that the manual breaker switch [A] is Important: When the breaker switch is UP, the copier is ready to be turned on. The "|"...
Page 71 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 5. Close the front door after "Open Cover" appears on the display. 6. Enter the SP mode and do SP3811 001. 7. Press [Execute]. Approximately 4 minutes is necessary for this operation. SP3811 001 does these tasks: Makes sure that all the seals are removed from each developer cartridge and that there is developer in each PCU.
Page 72: Load The Paper Trays
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Load the Paper Trays For each paper cassette tray: 1. Move the side fence and bottom fence to the correct positions for the paper. 2. Add paper to the trays. 3. Attach the paper size decals to the front of the paper cassette trays and the tandem tray.
Page 73 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 5. Remove the Color test chart C-4 from the exposure glass (this was put on the exposure glass during the previous procedure ‘Make a Test Color Print’). 6. Place the color test pattern face-down (this is the test pattern that you made in step 4).
Page 74: Counter Display Setting
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C Counter Display Setting The default setting for the counter is "0" (development). Do the SP setting below to set the counter for copy/print (paper count). 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Do SP5045 001 (Counter Display Setting).
Page 75: Connect The Upper And Lower Tray Heaters
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 Connect the Upper and Lower Tray Heaters B132I009.WMF The machine comes from the factory with the tray heaters disconnected. NOTE: Heater connection is optional, but the heaters must be connected if the location has high humidity. Speak with the customer before you connect the tray heaters.
Page 76: Breaker Switch Test Procedure
August, 2006 COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C 1.3.3 BREAKER SWITCH TEST PROCEDURE How to Test the Electrical Breaker Switch The following is the procedure for testing the electrical breaker switch. NOTE: The breaker switch is located at the left rear corner of the machine.
Page 77: To Return The Switch To The On Position
COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C August, 2006 To return the switch to the ON position: (Perform following 2 steps continuously) 1. Push down the switch to the lower (OFF) position [C]. (You will see the “o” mark.) 2. Push up the switch to the upper (ON) position [D]. (You will see the "|" mark.)
Page 78: Copy Tray (B756)
August, 2006 COPY TRAY (B756) 1.4 COPY TRAY (B756) 1.4.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Q’ty 1. Copy Tray ................1 2. Actuator Arm and Bracket (not used)........1 3. Tapping Screw (not used)........... 2 4.
Page 79: Installation
COPY TRAY (B756) August, 2006 1.4.2 INSTALLATION B756I101.WMF 1. Remove the left upper cover [A] ( x 2). 1-40...
Page 80 August, 2006 COPY TRAY (B756) B756I003.WMF 2. Attach the paper height sensor [A] and harness clamp [B] to the sensor bracket [C]. 3. Attach the sensor bracket and actuator arm bracket [D] to the copier ( x3). 4. Attach the sensor harness [E] ( x4).
Page 81 COPY TRAY (B756) August, 2006 B756I002.WMF 6. Reattach the left upper cover [A] ( x2). 7. Attach the copy tray [B]. 8. Attach the small caps [C] to the holes 9. Install the large cap [D] in the finisher power connection point. 1-42...
Page 82: A3/11" X 17" Paper Size Tray (B331)
A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) 1.5 A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) The A3/11" x 17" Paper Size Tray is installed in tray 1 of the copier e-STUDIO4500c/5500c. 1.5.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Page 83: Installation
A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) August, 2006 1.5.2 INSTALLATION B331I011.WMF WARNING! Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do the following procedure. 1. Remove the metal retainer [A] and packing material [B] ( x 1).
Page 84 August, 2006 A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) B331I707.WMF B331I708.WMF 3. Open the front doors. 4. Pull out the tandem feed tray [A] fully. 5. Push the right tandem tray [B] into the machine. 6. Remove the left tandem tray [C] ( x 2 left, x 3 right).
Page 85 A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) August, 2006 B331I102.WMF B331I709.WMF 7. From the left tandem tray, remove the front cover [A] ( x 2). 8. Pull out the right tandem tray [B], then remove it. ( x 2). 1-46...
Page 86 August, 2006 A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) B331I003.WMF B331I004.WMF 9. Put the short connector [A] into the socket in the machine [B]. NOTE: Hold the connector as shown in the illustration. 10. Install the A3 / 11”x17” paper size tray [C] on the right rail [D], center rail [E], and left rail [F].
Page 87 A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) August, 2006 B331I105.WMF 11. Install the front cover [A] ( x 2) that was removed from the left tandem tray. 12. Use SP5959 001 to select the paper size for Tray 1 (A3 or 11” x 17”). 13.
Page 88: Accessories
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. LCT (B473) Description 1. Upper docking pins (grooved) ............ 2 2. Lower docking pin (not grooved, not for e-STUDIO4500c/5500c). 1 3. Flat-head shoulder screw - M4x6 ..........1 4. Paper Set Decal ................. 1 B473I101.WMF...
Page 89: Lct Adapter (B699)
LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) August, 2006 LCT Adapter (B699) Description 1. Brackets ................. 2 2. Supports................. 3 3. Machine Screws (M3x8) ............3 4. Machine Screws (M4x8) ............6 B699I101.WMF 1-50...
Page 90: Removing Tape And Accessories
August, 2006 LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) 1.6.2 INSTALLATION Removing Tape and Accessories B473I001.WMF B473I002.WMF WARNING! Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure. 1. Remove the filament tape [A]. 2. Remove the decals [B]. 3.
Page 91: Lct Adapter (B699) Installation
LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) August, 2006 LCT Adapter (B699) Installation The LCT Adapter Kit B699 must be installed before you install the LCT. B699I102.WMF B699I103.WMF 1. Put the LCT [A] on its front side. Important! : Do not put the LCT on its right side (the open side), or you will bend the ground plate [B].
Page 92: Lct Installation
August, 2006 LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) LCT Installation B699I104.WMF 1. Remove the LCT installation cover [A] from the right side of the machine. x 2). 2. Remove the upper covers [B]. 3. Remove the lower covers [C]. 4. Attach the brackets [D] that are supplied with the LCT Adapter (B699) ( each –...
Page 93 LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) August, 2006 B699I115.WMF 6. Remove the connector cover [A]. 7. Align the holes on the side of the LCT [B] with the docking pins [C] on the side of the machine. 8. Slowly push the LCT onto the pins. NOTE: The release button [D] is used to unlock the LCT.
Page 94 August, 2006 LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) B699I107.WMF 10. Open the upper cover [A]. 11. Remove the cover [B] ( x 2). 12. Attach screws [C] to the brackets on the side of the machine. 13. Attach the cover [B] with the screw that you removed in Step 11. 14.
Page 95 LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) August, 2006 LCT (B473): Paper size change from A4 to 8 " x 11" (LT) Important: Start the following procedure after the copier installation and LCT installation are both completed. This is because to do the following procedure, the copier main power must be turned ON.
Page 96 August, 2006 LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) 4. Move the side fence brackets [E] from the A4 position to the 8 " x 11" (LT) position (1 screw for each bracket). NOTE: The various side fence positions are written on the bracket [F]. 5.
Page 97 LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699) August, 2006 6. Move the LCT end fence [I] from the A4 position to the 8 " x 11" (LT) position. 7. Insert the shaft [H] (1 snap ring). NOTE: NOTE: The various end fence positions are written on the LCT top cover [J].
Page 98: 1/2" X 14"/B4 Paper Size Tray (B474)
August, 2006 81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474) 1.7 8 " X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474) The 8 " x 14"/B4 (B474) is installed in the LCT (B473). 1.7.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Q’ty 1.
Page 99: Installation
81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474) August, 2006 1.7.2 INSTALLATION LCT Connected to the Machine B474I001.WMF B474I508.WMF WARNING! Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you start this procedure. 1. If the LCT is connected to the copier: Open the cover and remove the paper.
Page 100 August, 2006 81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474) 7. Attach the front bracket [A] with the beveled corner down ( x 2). NOTE: If the brackets are not easy to install, lift the bottom plate with your hand. 8. Attach the rear bracket [B] with the beveled corner down ( x 2).
Page 101 81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474) August, 2006 B474I506.WMF 14. Attach the cover [A] (8 " x 14"/B4) ( x 1). 15. Attach the right cover [B] ( x 2). 16. Connect the LCT to the machine. 17. Turn the machine on. 18.
Page 102: 2000/3000 Sheet Finishers (B700/B701)
August, 2006 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) 1.8 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) 1.8.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q’ty 1. Cushion (with double-sided tape)........... 1 2. Ground (earth) plate............... 1 3. Tapping screws - M4 x14 ............4 4. Tapping screws - M4 x 8 ............2 5.
Page 103: Installation
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) August, 2006 1.8.2 INSTALLATION This section shows the installation instructions for two finishers: B700 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher: This can do punching, shifting, stapling, and saddle-stitching with staples. This booklet finisher can be used with the e- STUDIO4500c/5500c.
Page 104: Removing Tapes And Packing Materials
August, 2006 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) Removing Tapes and Packing Materials B700 B701 B700I102.WMF B701I102.WMF 1. Remove the machine from its box, and remove all the wrapping. 2. Remove all filament tape and packing material from the finisher. B701 B700 B701I202.WMF B700I202.WMF 3.
Page 105 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) August, 2006 B700 B701 B701I204.WMF B700I204.WMF 5. Pull the jogger unit [A] out of the finisher. 6. Remove the tapes and retainers. 1-66...
Page 106: Docking The Finisher To The Copier
August, 2006 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) Docking the Finisher to the Copier B700I106.WMF 1. If you will not install the Cover Interposer B704: Remove the strip from the sponge cushion [A] and attach it to the finisher, then go to Step 2. Important! Do not put the sponge in a position that will prevent air flow through the air duct [B] on the copier after the finisher is connected to the copier.
Page 107 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) August, 2006 B700I105.WMF 2. Attach the rear joint bracket [A] ( x 2, M4 x 14). 3. Attach the front joint bracket [B] ( x 2, M4 x 14). 1-68...
Page 108 August, 2006 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) B700I107.WMF 4. Remove the screw [A] to release the lock lever [B] ( x 1). 5. Slowly push the finisher against the side of the machine until the brackets [D] go into their slots. If you do this too quickly, you will bend and cause damage to the paper-entrance guide plates [C].
Page 109: Attaching The Trays
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) August, 2006 Attaching the Trays B700 B701 B701I208.WMF B700I208.WMF B700 1. Attach the upper output tray [A] ( x 1, M3 x 6). NOTE: Make sure that the metal plate [B] is on the top of the tray. 2.
Page 110: Leveling The Finisher
August, 2006 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) Leveling the Finisher B701I109.WMF 1. Put the leveling shoes [A] (x 3) below the feet [B]. 2. Use a wrench to adjust the height of the screws [C] to make the machine level. 1-71...
Page 111: Support Tray
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) August, 2006 Support Tray B700I110.WMF Take the following steps if the "Exit Tray Full" message displays even though the exit tray is not full. (The message is caused by the trailing edges of excessively curled paper activating the tray full sensor [A] before the tray is actually full.) 1.
Page 112: Selecting The Staple Supply Name
August, 2006 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) Selecting the Staple Supply Name Enter the SP mode and input this information. 5841 Supply Name Setting These names show when the user prints the Inquiry List Push the Counter key, then push ‘Print Inquiry List’. Push the Inquiry button on the initial User Tools screen.
Page 113: Punch Unit (B702)
PUNCH UNIT (B702) August, 2006 1.9 PUNCH UNIT (B702) The Punch Unit B702 is installed in the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B700/B701. 1.9.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description 1. Punchout Waste Unit ............1 2. Slide Drive Unit ..............1 3.
Page 114: Installation
August, 2006 PUNCH UNIT (B702) 1.9.2 INSTALLATION B702I102.WMF Rear Front B702I103.WMF 1. If the finisher is connected to the copier, disconnect the power connector [A] and move the finisher away from the copier. 2. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 2) and open the front door.
Page 115 PUNCH UNIT (B702) August, 2006 3-pin connector B702I104.WMF B702I105.WMF 6. Attach the slide drive unit [A] to the finisher and connect it to the punching unit x 2, x 1). Push in the slide drive unit at when you attach screw 7.
Page 116 August, 2006 PUNCH UNIT (B702) 4-pin Connector B702I106.WMF B702I107.WMF 12. At the front, use a pair of wire cutters to remove the part [A] of the cover. 13. Install the punchout waste unit [B] in the finisher. NOTE: Make sure that the punchout waste unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it does not, make sure that the rails are aligned with the grooves.
Page 117: Mailbox (B762)
MAILBOX (B762) August 2006 1.10 MAILBOX (B762) The Mailbox B762 is installed on the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B700/B701. 1.10.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description 1. Trays ..................9 2. Guide plate................1 3. Decals (bin display)..............1 4.
Page 118: Installation
August 2006 MAILBOX (B762) 1.10.2 INSTALLATION B762I101.WMF WARNING! Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you start this procedure. 1. Remove the filament tape [A]. Important: Move the mailbox carefully. It is easy to cause damage to the corner leaf plate [B].
Page 119 MAILBOX (B762) August 2006 B762I102.WMF 2. If the Cover Interposer Tray B704 is installed on the B700/B701, remove it. NOTE: The cover interposer tray and mail box cannot be installed on the finisher at the same time. 3. Remove the top cover [A] of the finisher ( x1).
Page 120 August 2006 MAILBOX (B762) B762I103.WMF B762I104.WMF 5. Attach the guide plate [A] to the top of the finisher ( x2, M3x8). 6. Attach the mailbox [B] to the top of the finisher ( x4, M3x8). 7. Attach the 9 trays [C] to the mailbox. 8.
Page 121: 3000-Sheet Finisher (B706), Finisher Adapter (B698)
4. Front Joint Bracket..............1 5. Entrance Guide Plate............. 1 6. Ground (Earth) Plate.............. 1 7. Tray Holder (Not used for e-STUDIO4500c/5500c) ....1 8. Auxiliary Tray (Proof Tray) (Not used) ........1 9. Auxiliary Tray (Shift Tray) (Not used)........1 10.
Page 122: Finisher Adapter Kit B698 Accessories
August 2006 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) Finisher Adapter Kit B698 Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description 1. Upper Transport Motor Bracket..........1 2. Timing Belt ................1 3. Short Connector..............1 4. Harness.................. 1 5.
Page 123: Installation
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) August 2006 1.11.2 INSTALLATION WARNING! Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure. Shipping tape and retainers B706I002.WMF 1. Remove the finisher from its box. Remove all tapes and packing materials. 1-84...
Page 124 August 2006 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) B706I102.WMF B706I101.WMF 2. Open the front door [A] and remove tape and packing materials. 3. Pull the jogger unit [B] out of the finisher. 4. Remove brackets [C], [D], and [E] ( x 2 each) with their red tags and wires, and all tapes and packing materials.
Page 125: Finisher Adapter Kit B698 Installation
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) August 2006 Finisher Adapter B698 Installation B698I102.WMF B698I103.WMF 1. Remove the finisher rear cover [A] ( x2). 2. Connect the short connector [B] to CN137 on the finisher main board. 3. Remove the upper transport motor mount [C] ( x3, spring x1).
Page 126 August 2006 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) B698I104.WMF 4. Remove the transport motor [A] from the original bracket [B] ( x4). 5. Set the motor on the new bracket [C] supplied with the Finisher Adapter B698. 6. Attach the timing belt [D]. 7.
Page 127 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) August 2006 B698I105.WMF 8. Remove the harness clamp [A]. 9. Use wire cutters or radio pliers to remove harness clamp [B]. 10. Attach the transport motor assembly [C]. ( x2, spring x1). The harness [D] is supplied with the Finisher Adapter B698. Attach the screws but do not tighten.
Page 128 August 2006 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) B698I106.WMF B698I107.WMF 12. Put the harness clamps [A] and [B] (supplied with the B698) in the holes ( x2). Important: Be sure to put the harness clamps in the holes as shown. 13.
Page 129: Finisher Installation
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) August 2006 Finisher Installation B698I108.WMF B706I004.WMF 1. Attach the rear joint bracket [A] ( x 2) (M4 x 14). 2. Attach the front joint bracket [B] ( x 2) (M4 x 14). 3. Remove the connector cover [C]. 4.
Page 130 August 2006 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) B706I005.WMF B706I207.WMF 5. Install the table extension [A] ( x 2) (M4 x 8). 6. Make sure that the edge of the table extension is aligned with the edge of the finisher [B]. 7.
Page 131 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) August 2006 B706I006.WMF 8. Attach the shift tray [A] ( x 4) (M3 x 8). 9. Open the front door [B] of the finisher. 10. Remove the screw [C] from the lock lever [D], then pull out the lock lever. 11.
Page 132: Selecting The Staple Supply Name
August 2006 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) Selecting the Staple Supply Name Enter the SP mode and input this information 5841 Supply Name Setting These names show when the user prints the Inquiry List. To print this list press User Tools> [Inquiry]> [Print Inquiry List]>...
Page 133 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) August 2006 3. Peel the two-sided tape [B] off the stopper bracket [C]. 4. Attach the stopper bracket to position [D]. See details below. Important: Make sure the stopper bracket [C] is flat against the edge of bracket [G]. Make sure the stopper bracket [C] covers the shaft [F].
Page 134: Punch Unit B531
August 2006 PUNCH UNIT B531 1.12 PUNCH UNIT B531 The Punch Unit B531 is installed in the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. 1.12.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description 1. Punch unit................. 1 2. Punch Waste Hopper..............1 3.
Page 135: Installation
PUNCH UNIT B531 August 2006 1.12.2 INSTALLATION B531I09.WMF B531I002.WMF WARNING! Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you start this procedure. 1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it. 2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover ( x 2).
Page 136 August 2006 PUNCH UNIT B531 B531I003.WMF B531I004.WMF 7. Remove the paper guide [A] ( x 4). 8. Install the sensor arm and sensor [B] ( x 1), small step screw (M3 x 4). NOTE: Make sure that the sensor arm turns freely on the step screw. 9.
Page 137 PUNCH UNIT B531 August 2006 B531I006.WMF B531I005.WMF 10. At the rear side of the finisher, put the punch unit [A] in the finisher. 11. At the front side, attach the punch unit [B] with the large step screw ( x 1, M4 x 10).
Page 138 August 2006 PUNCH UNIT B531 B531I007.WMF B531I008.WMF 14. Connect the PCB harness connector [A] to CN129 of the finisher PCB and to CN600 of the punch unit PCB. 15. Connect the HP Sensor-2 harness connector [B] to CN130 of the finisher PCB and to HP Sensor-2.
Page 139: Output Jogger Unit (B703/B513)
OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513) August 2006 1.13 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513) The Output Jogger Unit B703 is installed in the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B700/B701. The Output Jogger Unit B513 is installed in the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. 1.13.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description 1.
Page 140 August 2006 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513) 1.13.2 INSTALLATION B703I103.WMF B703I102.WMF 1. Turn the main machine switch off. 2. Disconnect the finisher cable from the main frame. 3. Use the flat head of a screwdriver to remove the left upper cover [A]. 4.
Page 141 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513) August 2006 B703I104.WMF 5. While you hold the jogger unit with the connector [B] on the left, put the hooks of the frame of the jogger unit [A] into the holes in the left and right side of the finisher frame.
Page 142: Cover Interposer Tray (B704)
August 2006 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) 1.14 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) 1.14.1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description Q’ty 1. Front door extension (top)............1 2. Rear cover extension (bottom)..........1 3. Shoulder screws ..............3 4.
Page 143: Installation
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) August 2006 1.14.2 INSTALLATION You can install the Cover Interposer Tray B704 on these finishers: 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher B700 3000-Sheet Finisher B701 3000-Sheet Finisher B706 Removing Tapes and Packing Materials B704I102.WMF WARNING! Make sure that the finisher is disconnected from the main machine, and that the copier is turned off and the power cord is disconnected, before you start this procedure.
Page 144: Preparing The Finisher (B700/B701/B706)
August 2006 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) Preparing the Finisher (B700/B701/B706) B704I103.WMF 1. Remove the cover [A] of the relay connector. 2. Loosen the screw of the bracket [B] ( x 1) then remove the bracket. 3. Remove the guide plate [C]. (This guide plate will be attached to the cover interposer;...
Page 145: Attaching The Extensions For The B706
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) August 2006 Attaching the Extensions for the B706 Important! The procedures in this section are for installation of the cover interposer with the B706 only. If you will install the cover interposer with the B700/B701, go to the next section. Modify the Attachments for the B706 Front Door Extension (Top) Rear Cover Extension (Bottom)
Page 146 August 2006 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) Prepare the Cover Interposer for the B706 B706I900.WMF 1. Remove spacer [A] ( x1). 2. Attach spacer [B] ( x1). 3. Remove the screws from the connector case [C] ( x2). 4. Push the connector case in the direction of the arrow until the second set of holes are aligned with the holes below, then attach the screws.
Page 147 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) August 2006 Attach the Extensions to the B706 B704I110.WMF 1. Attach the three shoulder screws [A] x 3). 2. If the finisher was previously installed, remove the ground plate [B] from the finisher and keep the screws. 3.
Page 148: Attaching The Extensions For The B700/B701
August 2006 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) Attaching the Extensions for the B700/B701 B704I104.WMF 1. Attach the three shoulder screws [A] x 3). 2. If the finisher has been previously installed, remove the ground plate [B] from the finisher and save the screws. 3.
Page 149: Attaching The Interposer Tray (B700/B701/B706)
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) August 2006 Attaching the Interposer Tray (B700/B701/B706) B704I105.WMF 1. Pick up the cover interposer tray, align the keyholes [A] with the shoulder screws [B], then slide the cover interposer down onto the screws. 2. Secure the cover interposer with the screw [C] ( x 1, M3 x 6).
Page 150: Attaching The Corner Plates For The B706
August 2006 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) Attaching the Corner Plates for the B706 Important: The corner plates are installed on the B706 only. Right Rear Corner Plate (B706 only) B704I112.WMF 1. Temporarily attach the screws [A] (with about two turns) to the right end of the finisher extension table [B] ( x 2, tapping M4 x 8) NOTE: The holes are not visible because they are covered with tape.
Page 151 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) August 2006 B704I111.WMF 4. Temporarily attach the screw [A] (M4 x 8) with about two turns to fasten to the panel at the right front corner. NOTE: The hole is not invisible because it covered with tape. Just punch the screw through the hole.
Page 152 August 2006 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) Docking Finisher and Interposer to the Machine (B700/B701/B706) B704I121.WMF 1. Attach the rear bracket [A] ( x 2, M4 x14). 2. Attach the front bracket [B] ( x 2, M4 x14). 3. Attach the gasket seals [C] and [D]. 1-113...
Page 153 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) August 2006 B704I106.WMF 4. Attach the sponge strip [A] that is supplied with the finisher. 5. Attach the guide plate (removed from the finisher) to the cover interposer. Attach the front end [B] of the plate ( x 1).
Page 154: Overview
August 2006 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS 1.15 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS 1.15.1 OVERVIEW The machine controller box has five board slots and 3 SD cards. Make sure that each board and SD card is put in the correct slot. For more, please see the decal on the controller box.
Page 155: Accessory Cards
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 1.15.2 ACCESSORY CARDS B737I102.WMF Code Name Slot Page Not use B328 Copy Connector Type 3260 1-132 EFI-V G815 EFI Printer Controller (E-7000) 1-134 Not use Not use Not use Not use Printer/Scanner unit GM-2100 1-123 Note: Items must be in the same slot.
Page 156: Applications Provided On Sd Cards
August 2006 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS 1.15.3 APPLICATIONS PROVIDED ON SD CARDS B132I909.WMF These applications are available on SD cards [A]. You install them in Slot 2: Printer/Scanner Unit GM-2100 PostScript3 Unit Type 3260 (B761) Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C (B735) Slot 2 is the only slot available for these application SD cards.
Page 157: Handling Dimms And Sd Cards
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 1.15.4 HANDLING DIMMS AND SD CARDS WARNING! Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you install a controller option. Important! To prevent damage to the controller box, always do your work carefully. Do not put your hand or a tool into the box when you remove the controller box or install an option.
Page 158: Merging Applications On One Sd Card
August 2006 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS 1.15.5 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD Overview Only one SD card slot is available for SD card applications. NEXT COPIER The machine has three SD card slots. Slot CARD 1 is used for the system card. Slot 2 is L-ADP used for application programs, and Slot 3 I/F Card Slot...
Page 159: Merging Applications
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 Merging Applications Do this procedure to put more than one application on one SD card. 1. Turn off the copier. 2. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x2). 3. Put the Source SD card in Slot 3 (top slot). This card contains the application that you want to copy.
Page 160: Undo Exec
August 2006 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS Undo Exec 1. Turn the main switch off. 2. Put the SD card with the merged applications in SD Card Slot 2. 3. Put the original destination SD card (the one stored in the front door) into Slot 3. NOTE: The SD card in Slot 3 must be the original SD card of the application you want to move from Slot 2 to Slot 3.
Page 161: Storing Sd Application Cards On Site
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 Storing SD Application Cards on Site B132I728.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the cover [A] on the door ( x2). 3. Remove the block [B]. 4. Store the SD cards [C] inside the cover. 5.
Page 162: Accessories
August 2006 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS 1.15.6 PRINTER/SCANNER UNIT GM-2100 (B737) Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description 1. Scanner/Printer DIMM ............1 2. NIB (Network Interface Board)..........1 3. Printer/Scanner SD card............1 4. Screws - M3x8............... 2 5.
Page 163: Installation
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 Installation WARNING! Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you start this procedure. NOTE: For the printer/scanner unit, the machine must have a minimum of 128 MB of memory (more is recommended). Memory chips are not supplied with this option.
Page 164 August 2006 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS 10. Wind the Ethernet cable [A] around the ferrite core [B] as shown. 150 mm (6 in.) 11. Make sure there is a minimum of 150 mm (6 in.) between the ferrite core and the end of the cable. 12.
Page 165: Usb Sp Settings
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 USB SP Settings The following SP commands are available. But, only one setting can be adjusted, and this must only be done if the customer has USB data transmission errors. NOTE: Do not change the settings marked “DFU”. These settings are for design and factory use only.
Page 166: Postscript3 Unit Type 3260 (B761)
August 2006 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS 1.15.7 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE 3260 (B761) Accessory Check Check the accessories and their quantities against this list: Description Q’ty 1. SD Card................. 1 B132I909.WMF 1. Remove the slot cover [A]. 2. Put the PostScript3 SD card [B] in SD card slot 2 (middle slot). Important Only one SD card slot is available for applications.
Page 167: Dataoverwritesecurity Unit Type C (B735)
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 1.15.8 DATAOVERWRITESECURITY UNIT TYPE C (B735) Accessory Check Check the accessories and their quantities against this list: Description Q’ty 2. SD Card................. 1 Before You Begin… You must copy the DataOverwriteSecurity card to another application SD card. The original SD card, with the DataOverwriteSecurity application only, cannot be used.
Page 168: Seal Check And Removal
August 2006 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS Seal Check And Removal B692I901.WMF B692I903.WMF CAUTION Before you start the installation, you must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed in the box at the factory.
Page 169: Installation Procedure
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 Installation Procedure CAUTION The machine should always be turned off and its power cord disconnected before you do this procedure. 1. If the machine is on, turn off the main power switch. 2. Disconnect the network cable (if the machine is connected to a network).
Page 170 August 2006 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS 7. Enter the SP mode and do SP5878. 8. Go out of the SP mode, turn the operation switch off, then turn the main power switch off. 9. Turn the machine power on. 10. Enter the User Tools mode, and select System Settings> Administrator> Auto Erase Memory Setting>...
Page 171: Copy Connector Type 3260 (B328)
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 1.15.9 COPY CONNECTOR TYPE 3260 (B328) B737I904.WMF 1. Turn the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure. 2. Remove the cover [A] of Slot B ( x 2). 3. Install the Copy Connector Board B328 [B] in Slot B and attach it with the screws.
Page 172 August 2006 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS B737I112A.WMF 5. Remove the controller box cover [C] ( x3). 6. Connect the power repeater cable [B] to: CN594 7. Reattach the controller box cover and rear upper cover. 8. Repeat Steps 1 to 7 to install the connection kit on the second machine. 9.
Page 173: Efi Printer Controller (G815)
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS August 2006 1.15.10 EFI PRINTER CONTROLLER (G815) B737I905.WMF 1. Turn the machine off. 2. Remove the cover [A] of Slot C ( x 2). 3. Install the EFI Printer Controller (G815) board [B] in Slot C and attach it with the screws.
Page 174: Preventive Maintenance
Important The Lubricant Powder (B1329700) (composed of Zinc Stearate) is specially designed for this machine (e-STUDIO4500c/5500c). If this lubricant powder is not available, please use this machine’s yellow toner. Always use this lubricant powder to lubricate the drum and ITB during servicing.
Page 175: Pm Counter
PM COUNTER August, 2006 2.2 PM COUNTER The PM Counter main menu and submenu allows you to review the PM counts for both units and individual components. 2.2.1 DISPLAYING THE PM COUNTER 1. Press [Clear Modes] ( )> "107"> [Clear/Stop] ( B132P901.BMP 2.
Page 176: Pm Parts Screen Details
August, 2006 PM COUNTER 2.2.2 PM PARTS SCREEN DETAILS All PM Parts list: Main Menu The "All PM Parts list" displays all PM units and individual items. This list shows all PM items, regardless of their "PM yield indicator settings". ( Pg.2-4) B132P903.BMP [A]: Number buttons.
Page 177 PM COUNTER August, 2006 Number button submenu Press any number button to open the submenu for a part. In the example below, the number button [001] #K:PCU was pressed. B132P904.BMP [A]: Clear current counter. Press to reset the selected PM counter (in this example 001 #K:PCU) to "0".
Page 178 August, 2006 PM COUNTER Parts list for PM yield indicator This list shows the PM Parts Main Menu with only items set to "Yes" displayed. B132P905.BMP Note the following: The # mark denotes a unit. Items without the # (065 ITB) denote individual components. An asterisk will appear in the Exceed column [A] to show items that that have exceeded their target PM yields.
Page 179: Pm Tables
PM TABLES August, 2006 2.3 PM TABLES 2.3.1 MAIN MACHINE Symbol Key for PM Tables Inspect. Clean, replace, or lubricate as needed. Cleaning required. Replacement required. Lubrication required. Silicone Grease 501 (52039502) Grease Barrierta – S552R (A2579300) Grease – KS660 – SHIN-ETSU (G0049668) Heat Resisting Grease MT-78 (54479078) Launa Oil 40 (54429103) Emergency Maintenance...
Page 180 August, 2006 PM TABLES 150K 300K 600K Note Charge Roller Unit Drum Cleaning Blade Lubricant Bar PCU Cleaning Unit Lubricant Brush 3.5.5) Toner Brush PCU Cleaning Unit 3.5.5) PCU Joint PCU Cleaning Unit 3.5.5) Quenching LED Potential Sensor Blower brush. Note: Never use a vacuum cleaner around this sensor.
Page 181 PM TABLES August, 2006 150K 300K 600K Note FUSING UNIT Fusing Belt Hot Roller Pressure Roller Hot Roller Cleaning Roller Pressure Roller Cleaning Felt Roller 3.9.9) Fusing Belt Lubrication Roller Heating Roller C, L Heating Roller Shaft Bearings Service Life: 1200K Hot Roller Shaft Bearings C, L Service Life: 1200K...
Page 182 August, 2006 PM TABLES 150K 300K 600K Note PAPER FEED (Trays) Feed Guide Plate Dry cloth Grip Rollers (Drive & Idle) Alcohol, dry cloth Pick-up Rollers (Tray 1 to Tray 3) Service Life: 1000K Replace if jams, Paper Feed Rollers (Tray 1 to Tray double-feeds occur with increasing Separation Rollers (Tray 1 to Tray 3)
Page 183: Ardf Pm Parts
PM TABLES August, 2006 ARDF PM Parts NOTE: The "K" number in the table below is the number of originals that have been fed. Every PM Every Note Visit 120K External Covers I, C Alcohol or water, dry cloth Feed Belt Pick-up Roller Separation Roller Original Length Sensors...
Page 184: Sheet Booklet Finisher B700/B701
August, 2006 PM TABLES 2.3.2 2000/3000-SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER B700/B701 300K 2400K 3000K 4000K Note FINISHER Covers Alcohol or water, dry cloth Drive Rollers Damp cloth, dry cloth Idle Rollers Damp cloth, dry cloth Anti-Static Brush Dry cloth Sensors Blower brush Print an SMC report with Corner Stapler SP5990.
Page 185: Cover Interposer Tray B704
PM TABLES August, 2006 2.3.6 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704 60K 120K 180K Note The PM interval is for the number of sheets that have been fed. Feed Belt Replace as a set. Pick-up Roller Separation Roller Driver Rollers Damp clean cloth. Idle Rollers Discharge Brush Sensors...
Page 186: Replacement And Adjustment
August, 2006 LUBRICATION POINTS 2.4 LUBRICATION POINTS 2.4.1 COPIER OPC, ITB Replacement B132R319.WMF B023R960.WMF Be sure to apply Lubricant Powder B1329700 when re-installing the drum [A] or ITB [B]. For more, please refer to section "3. Replacement and Adjustment". 2-13...
Page 187: Fusing Unit
LUBRICATION POINTS August, 2006 Fusing Unit B132P906.WMF B132P907.WMF Part Name Lubricant Comment Hot Roller Drive Gear Exit Idle Gear Barrierta S552R Brush all gear teeth Upper Gear Lower Gear Barrierta S552R Bearing Race 20 x 32 x 7 Hot Roller Sleeve Be sure to brush both ends.
Page 188: Replacement And Adjustment
August, 2006 GENERAL CAUTIONS 3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS Never switch off either power switch while any of the electrical components are operating. Doing so might cause damage to units such as the transfer belt, drum, and development unit when they are pulled out of or put back into the copier. 3.1.1 DRUM An organic photoconductor (OPC) drums are more sensitive to light and ammonia gas than a selenium drum.
Page 189: Transfer Belt Unit
GENERAL CAUTIONS August, 2006 3.1.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT 1. Never touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands. 2. Take care not to scratch the transfer belt, as the surface is easily damaged. 3. Before installing a new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and the inner part of the transfer belt with a dry cloth to prevent the belt from slipping.
Page 190: Development
August, 2006 GENERAL CAUTIONS 3.1.6 DEVELOPMENT 1. Avoid nicking or scratching the development roller. 2. Place a development unit on a sheet of paper after removing it from a PCU. 3. Always clean the drive gears after removing used developer. 4.
Page 191: Cleaning
GENERAL CAUTIONS August, 2006 3.1.7 CLEANING 1. When servicing cleaning components, avoid nicking the edges of the cleaning blades. 2. Never handle a cleaning blade with bare hands. 3. Before disassembling a cleaning section, place a sheet of paper under it to catch any toner falling.
Page 192: Common Removal Procedures
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES 3.2 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES 3.2.1 ARDF B132R101.WMF 1. Raise the ARDF [A] to the vertical position. 2. At the rear, left corner of the machine, disconnect the ARDF cable. 3. Remove the left screw [B] and right screw [C]. 4.
Page 193: Operation Panel, Top Covers
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 3.2.2 OPERATION PANEL, TOP COVERS B132R701.WMF Remove the ARDF ( x2). Open the front door. Remove: [A]: Operation panel ( [B]: Top rear cover ( [C]: Left top cover ( [D]: Right top cover (...
Page 194: Left Covers
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES 3.2.3 LEFT COVERS B132R702.WMF If a finisher is installed, disconnect it. Then remove the front and rear finisher joint brackets. Remove: [A]: Left upper cover ( [B]: Left lower cover ( Reinstallation Make sure all the cover tabs are inserted correctly before you fasten the screws.
Page 195: Front Door
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 3.2.4 FRONT DOOR B132R703.WMF 1. Grip the front door [A] with one hand. 2. Press down the hinge bracket [B]. 3. Lift the front door slightly to remove it. Important: If you must replace the front door, make sure that you put the SD cards from the storage location in the old front door into the storage location in the new front door.
Page 196: Right Covers
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES 3.2.5 RIGHT COVERS B132R704.WMF Remove: Disconnect and separate the LCT if it is installed. [A]: LCT installation cover ( x2). This has been removed already if the LCT has been installed. [B]: Open the bypass tray. [C]: Right upper cover ( x2).
Page 197: Rear Covers
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 3.2.6 REAR COVERS B132R705.WMF Remove: [A]: ARDF connector ( [B]: Rear upper cover ( [C]: Rear lower cover ( Remove the bottom screws Do not remove the shoulder screws. 3-10...
Page 198: Toner Hopper, Faceplate, Pcu
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES 3.2.7 TONER HOPPER, FACE PLATE, PCU Removing Toner Hopper, Face plate, PCU B132I006A.WMF Important: To avoid damaging the toner end sensor, make sure that the main power switch is turned off and that the power cord is disconnected from the power source before you remove the toner hopper.
Page 199 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 To remove the face plate B132R201.WMF B132I902.WMF 8. Rotate the transfer belt release lever [A] counter-clockwise until it stops. 9. Disconnect the fan connector [B]. 10. Remove the face plate [C] ( x5). 11. Place the PCU stand [D] on a flat surface. NOTE: The PCU stand is mounted on a rack attached to the bottom of the copier with magnets.
Page 200 August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES To remove a PCU B132R202A.WMF Important: To prevent damage to the drum potential sensor and its relay board, always make sure that the machine is turned off and that the power cord is disconnected from the power source before you remove a PCU. 13.
Page 201 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 B132R214.WMF MPORTANT PCU. DRUM IS EXPOSED ON THE BOTTOM OF THE PCU. EVER PLACE YOUR HAND UNDER THE EVER PLACE THE ON ANY SURFACE OTHER THAN THE STAND 14. Set the PCU [A] on the PCU stand [B]. NOTE: In the diagram, F is the front, and R is the rear.
Page 202: Reinstalling Pcu, Face Plate, Toner Hopper
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES Reinstalling PCU, Face plate, Toner Hopper To reinstall a PCU: B132I114.WMF 1. Hold the PCU [A] in front of the slot where you removed it 2. Engage the rails [B] with the slots in the sides of the PCU. 3.
Page 203 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 B132I115.WMF To reinstall the face plate: 1. When you reattach the face plate [A], fasten the screws in the order shown by the numbers above ( x5). Important: Do not over tighten these screws. 2. Rotate the transfer belt release lever [B] clockwise to lock it. 3.
Page 204 August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES B132R908.WMF To reinstall the toner hopper: 1. Confirm that the transfer belt release lever [A] is up and locked before you reattach the toner hopper. 2. Make sure the toner hopper rails are fully extended, then set the toner hopper [B] on the rails.
Page 205: Image Transfer Unit
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 3.2.8 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT B132R201.WMF 1. Cover the floor or a table with paper to prepare a place to put the image transfer unit. 2. Open the front door. 3. Remove the toner hopper then push the hopper rails into the machine. ( 3.2.7) 4.
Page 206 August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES B132R309.WMF 8. Slowly and carefully pull the image transfer unit [A] out of the machine. Important! Remove carefully. The image transfer unit is heavy and not attached to the rails with screws. To prevent toner scattering inside and outside the unit, keep the unit [B] flat when you remove it, lift it, carry it, and put it down.
Page 207: Drawer Unit
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 3.2.9 DRAWER UNIT B132R900.WMF To pull out the drawer unit: B132R301.WMF 1. Remove the front door. ( 3.2.4) 2. Rotate the lever [A] counter-clockwise until it stops. 3. Grip the lever and pull the unit [B] out of the machine until it stops. To remove the drawer unit: 4.
Page 208 August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES To re-install the drawer unit B132R617.WMF 1. Remove the right upper cover and the left upper cover. ( 3.2.3, 3.2.5,) 2. Open the front door. 3. Pull out the left rail and right rail. 4. Set the unit on the rails. CAUTION The drawer unit is very heavy (30 kg/66lb.).
Page 209: Duplex Unit
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 3.2.10 DUPLEX UNIT B132R501.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Pull the duplex unit [A] out until it stops. 3. Remove the clip ring [B] from the left, rear corner ( x1). 4. Remove the clip ring [C] from the right, rear corner ( x1).
Page 210: Opening And Locking The Controller Box Cover
August, 2006 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES 3.2.11 OPENING AND LOCKING THE CONTROLLER BOX COVER B132R715.WMF CAUTION: 1) Before you start this procedure, turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord. 2) To prevent personal injury and damage to the controller box, when the controller box is open, it should always be locked as described below.
Page 211: Sd Card Storage
COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August, 2006 3.2.12 SD CARD STORAGE B132R728.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the cover [A] on the door ( x2). 3. Remove the block [B]. 4. Store extra SD cards [C] inside the cover. 5. Reattach the cover to the machine Important When you replace the door, confirm whether SD cards are stored here.
Page 212: Scanner Unit
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT 3.3 SCANNER UNIT 3.3.1 EXPOSURE GLASS B132R128.WMF Remove: [A]: Rear scale ( [B]: Left glass cover ( [C]: Exposure glass 3-25...
Page 213: Lens Block, Paper Size Sensors
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 3.3.2 LENS BLOCK, PAPER SIZE SENSORS B132R130.WMF B132R141.WMF Before you remove the lens block, note the settings of SP4800 001 to 003 (ARDF density adjustments for R, G, B). SP4800 001 DF Density Adj: R ARDF Density Adjustment - Red SP4800 002 DF Density Adj: G ARDF Density Adjustment - Green...
Page 214: Exposure Lamp
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT 3.3.3 EXPOSURE LAMP B132R129.WMF Remove: Exposure glass ( 3.3.1) Operation panel ( 3.2.2) 1. Slide the 1st scanner [A] to the cutout in the frame. 2. Remove the exposure lamp [B] ( Important: Never touch the surface of the exposure lamp with bare fingers. Work carefully to avoid damaging the relay plugs attached to the rear ends of the lamp.
Page 215: Scanner Motor
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 3.3.4 SCANNER MOTOR B132R132A.WMF Remove: Exposure glass ( 3.3.1) [A]: Lens cover ( [B]: Right lens cover ( [C]: Top right cover ( B132R133.WMF [D]: Bracket ( [E]: Scanner motor (Timing belt x1, 3-28...
Page 216: Scanner Hp Sensor
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT 3.3.5 SCANNER HP SENSOR B132R134A.WMF Remove: ARDF ( 3.2.1) Exposure glass ( 3.3.1) Top rear, left, right covers ( 3.2.5) [A]: Ground plate ( [B]: Left stay ( [C]: Right stay ( [D]: Rear stay ( [E]: Scanner HP sensor ( 3-29...
Page 217: Scanner Interface Board (Siob)
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 3.3.6 SCANNER INTERFACE BOARD (SIOB) B132R133A.WMF Remove: ARDF ( 3.2.1) Exposure glass ( 3.3.1) Top, rear, left, right covers ( 3.2.5) Right stay, rear stay ( 3.3.5) Lens cover ( 3.3.2) [A]: Scanner interface board ( 3-30...
Page 218: Scanner Wire
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT 3.3.7 SCANNER WIRE Scanner Wire Removal B132R137.WMF 1. Remove wire ground 2. Disconnect the head of wire from tension bracket 1. 3. Remove spring 4. Loosen the screw of tension bracket 1. 5. Disconnect the end of wire at 6.
Page 219: Scanner Wire Reinstallation And Scanner Position Adjustment
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 Scanner Wire Reinstallation and Scanner Position Adjustment B132R136.WMF 1. Place the beads [A] on the middle of the wire on the pulley openings. 2. Wind the ball end of the wire [B] 4 times. 3. Wind the other end of the wire [C] 5 times. 4.
Page 220 August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT B132R138.WMF 5. Position the 1st scanner [A] so the holes are aligned and insert the positioning pins [B] (x2). 6. Position the 2nd scanner [C] so its holes are aligned and insert the positioning pins [D] (x2). 7.
Page 221: Laser Unit
LASER UNIT August, 2006 3.4 LASER UNIT WARNING This laser unit employs two laser beams produced by a Class III LD with a wavelength of 648 to 660 nm and intensity of 7 mW. Direct exposure to the eyes could cause permanent blindness. Before any performing any replacement or adjustment of the laser unit, press the main power switch to power the machine off then unplug the machine from the power source.
Page 222: Polygon Motor
August, 2006 LASER UNIT 3.4.2 POLYGON MOTOR WARNING Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing any procedure in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes. Important! An accidental static discharge could damage the laser diode board attached to the lens block unit.
Page 223: Laser Unit
LASER UNIT August, 2006 3.4.3 LASER UNIT B132R101.WMF B132R701.WMF Remove: [A]: ARDF ( [B]: Left top cover ( [C]: Rear top cover ( [D]: Right top cover ( [E]: Operation panel ( 3-36...
Page 224 August, 2006 LASER UNIT B132R001.WMF Remove: [A]: Right plate ( [B]: Left plate ( [C]: Ground wire ( [D]: Cross piece ( [E]: Detach the support rod from the rubber clamps. Next, do the following: [F]: Raise the scanner unit. ( x 2) [G]: Set the support rod at the base then under the front, right...
Page 225 LASER UNIT August, 2006 B132R003.WMF Remove: [A]: Laser unit ( NOTE: The laser unit includes four LD sub units. However, the LD sub units cannot be replaced separately because factory adjustment is required. Reinstallation , are set correctly in the holes. Make sure that the four tapes Be sure to reconnect the ground wire ([C] on the previous page).
Page 226: Adjustments After Laser Unit Replacement
August, 2006 LASER UNIT Adjustments After Laser Unit Replacement SP Adjustments B132R904.WMF 1. SP codes are written on an A5 sheet provided with the laser unit. These SP codes must be done after the laser unit is replaced. SP2154 001 (K) SP2154 002 (M) SP2154 003 (C) SP2154 004 (Y)
Page 227: Laser Synchronization Detector
LASER UNIT August, 2006 3.4.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR B132R004.WMF Remove: [A]: Laser unit ( 3.4.3) [B]: Laser synchronization detector ( NOTE: In the figure above, note the locations of the 8 laser synchronization detectors (shown within the circles). 3-40...
Page 228: Developer Replacement
August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) 3.5 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) 3.5.1 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT B132R220.WMF B132R214.WMF 1. Spread some paper on a flat surface to hold developer that will be dumped from the development unit. 2. Remove the toner hopper and face plate. ( 3.2.7) 3.
Page 229 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 B132R210.WMF 8. Remove the drum ( 3.5.4). Cover it with a sheet of A3/DLT paper to protect it from light. 9. Vacuum inside the PCU. NOTE: Do not vacuum around the brush roller (in the PCU cleaning unit) and around the drum potential sensor.
Page 230 August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) B132I105.WMF 13. Place the development unit [A] on a clean sheet of A3/DLT paper [B]. 14. With a fingernail release the tabs [C] on the left. 15. Hold the development unit steady with one hand [D] as you remove the old cartridge [E] from the development unit.
Page 231 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 B132R219.WMF 16. At the rear of the development unit, attach the lock gear [A] to the development roller shaft. 17. At the front, attach the long special tool [B]. Important The D-shaped hole of the long special tool [B] must fit over the D-shaped shaft tip [C].
Page 232 August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) B132R218.WMF 19. Place the development unit [A] inside the disposal bag [B] provided. 20. Turn the development unit upside- down, then rotate the lock gear [C] in the direction of the arrow to dump the developer/toner into the bag.
Page 233 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 B132I106.WMF B132I106A.WMF 24. Thread the film seal [A] through hole [B]. 25. Slide the developer cartridge down [C] on the left so the holes and tabs [D] are aligned. 26. Press in on the middle of the developer cartridge [E] to lock the tabs inside [F]. 27.
Page 234 August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) B132I106B.WMF B132I106C.WMF 28. Check the following to points to be sure that the developer cartridge is set properly. Tabs [A] and [B] should be locked. The developer cartridge edge [C] should be flat and not bulging or floating away from the side of the development unit Pull gently on the developer cartridge at [D] to make sure that it does not part from the development unit.
Page 235 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 30. Re-install the development unit in the PCU. 31. Reattach the small and large plate at the front and rear. 32. Push the PCU fully into the slot to reinstall it. 33. To release the developer in the PCU, pull out the film seal [A].
Page 236: Development Gears
August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) 3.5.2 DEVELOPMENT GEARS B132R225.WMF Remove: PCU ( 3.2.7) Development unit ( 3.5.1) [A]: TD sensor connector ( x1; this is a tapping screw) [B]: Development gear cover ( [C]: Development roller idle gear [D]: Development roller gear (C-ring x1) 3-49...
Page 237: Charge Roller Unit
PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 3.5.3 CHARGE ROLLER UNIT Remove: PCU ( 3.2.7) [A]: Charge roller unit ( x2). This unit contains the charge roller and charge roller cleaning roller B132R203.WMF [B]: Weight NOTE: The weight must be used during the full service life of the machine.
Page 238: Drum And Cleaning Blade
August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) 3.5.4 DRUM AND CLEANING BLADE B132R205.WMF Removing the OPC Drum Remove: PCU ( 3.2.7) Charge roller unit ( 3.5.3) [A]: Rear bracket ( [B]: Front bracket ( [C]: Rotate the cleaning unit to the right 90 degrees. [D]: OPC drum.
Page 239: Removing The Cleaning Blade
PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 B132R206.WMF Removing the Cleaning Blade Remove: PCU ( 3.2.7) Charge roller unit ( 3.5.3) Drum ( 3.5.4) Open the upper cover of the cleaning unit 90 degrees to the right. [A]: Bracket [B]: Cleaning blade ( Important After you replace the cleaning blade, always coat the drum with Lubricant Powder B1329700.
Page 240 August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) Reinstallation of the drum To prevent scouring a new drum when the machine is turned on, coat the new drum [A] with Lubricant Powder (B1329700) before you install it. Important (B1329700) ( UBRICANT OWDER COMPOSED OF TEARATE IS SPECIALLY DESIGNED FOR THIS (e-STUDIO4500...
Page 241: Pcu Cleaning Unit
PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 3.5.5 PCU CLEANING UNIT B132R208.WMF Remove: PCU ( 3.2.7) Charge roller unit ( 3.5.3) Drum ( 3.5.4) [A]: PCU joint [B]: Rear bracket ( [C]: Long sleeve [D]: Leaf spring [E]: Short sleeve [F]: Bracket and 2 gears ( [G]: Cleaning unit When you remove the cleaning unit, the mylar can catch on the PCU frame and will scatter toner.
Page 242 August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) B132R208C.WMF B132R208B.WMF Reinstallation 1. Install the new cleaning unit [A] in the PCU. 2. Check the positions of the seals at the rear and front: There must be no gap [B] between the edge of a seal and the edge of the cleaning blade.
Page 243: Td Sensor
PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 3.5.6 TD SENSOR B132R223.WMF Remove: Open the front door. Remove the PCU from the machine. ( 3.2.7) [A]: Connector bracket ( [B]: TD sensor ( Reinstallation After replacing the TD sensor: Replace the developer in the PCU where the TD sensor was replaced. ( 3.5.1) Do SP3801 001 - 006 only for the PCU where the TD sensor was replaced.
Page 244: After Replacing The Pcu Components And Developer
August, 2006 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) 3.5.7 AFTER REPLACING THE PCU COMPONENTS AND DEVELOPER Do the following procedure after you replace the PCU, development, or any related parts. Pay attention to the combination of replaced parts in the table below (require procedures are different).
Page 245 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS) August, 2006 Important! NLY INITIALIZE THE SENSOR ONE TIME O NOT DO IT MORE THAN ONE TIME Only initialize the TD sensor at the following times: At installation, exactly as explained in the installation procedure. After you replace developer (only initialize the TD sensor for the color that you replaced) As instructed in specific troubleshooting procedures.
Page 246: Toner Supply Unit
August, 2006 TONER SUPPLY UNIT 3.6 TONER SUPPLY UNIT 3.6.1 STC PORT CLEANING B132R215.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the STC holder front cover [A] ( 3. Remove the STC bottom cover [B] (Pawls x2) 4. Wrap a clean cloth around the tip of a small screwdriver then scrape away any toner that has collected inside the bottom holder front cover.
Page 247: Connector Board (Cnb)
TONER SUPPLY UNIT August, 2006 3.6.2 CONNECTOR BOARD (CNB) B132R216.WMF Remove: Open the front door. Remove the toner hopper ( 3.2.7) [A]: Support bracket ( [B]: CNB ( x1). Slide the PCB assembly to the right and remove it. 3-60...
Page 248: Toner Pump
August, 2006 TONER SUPPLY UNIT 3.6.3 TONER PUMP B132R217.WMF Remove: Open the front door. Toner hopper ( 3.2.7) Support bracket ( 3.6.2) Connector Board ( 3.6.2) [A]: Toner pump assembly ( x3, Bushing x1, x1). Pull the assembly straight down and remove it. 3-61...
Page 249: Toner End Sensor
TONER SUPPLY UNIT August, 2006 3.6.4 TONER END SENSOR B132R213.WMF Remove: Open the front door. Toner hopper ( 3.2.7) [A]: Toner end sensor ( 3-62...
Page 250: Toner Hopper Motor
August, 2006 TONER SUPPLY UNIT 3.6.5 TONER HOPPER MOTOR B132R211.WMF Remove: Open the front door. Toner hopper ( 3.2.7) [A]: Motor cover ( [B]: Toner hopper motor ( 3-63...
Page 251: Paper Transfer Unit
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.7 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 3.7.1 RELAY SENSOR B132R615.WMF Pull out the drawer unit. ( 3.2.9) [A]: Sensor bracket ( [B]: Relay sensor ( Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4). 3-64...
Page 252: Double-Feed Detection Sensor Registration Sensor
August, 2006 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 3.7.2 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR B132R616.WMF Pull out the drawer unit. ( 3.2.9) Open the guide plate [A]. Remove: [B]: Sensor support plate ( [C]: Double-feed detection sensor ( [D]: Registration sensor ( Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
Page 253: Paper Transfer Unit
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.7.3 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT B132R302.WMF B132R302A.WMF Pull out the drawer unit. ( 3.2.9) Remove: [A]: Paper transport unit cover ( [B]: Timing belt, gear ( NOTE: Do not loosen or remove the paint-locked screws. [C]: Press the release forward [D]: Raise the handle to the vertical position.
Page 254 August, 2006 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT B132R303.WMF Change the position of: [A]: Spring [B]: Spring Remove: [C]: Spring [D]: Connector ( x1) (use a pair of small pliers to remove the connector) [E]: Bracket ( [F]: Paper transfer unit (PTR unit) The handle should be up.
Page 255 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.7.4 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER, PAPER DISCHARGE PLATE B132R304.WMF Remove: Paper transfer unit ( 3.7.3) [A]: Paper discharge plate ( [B]: Paper transfer roller ( x2, Gear x1, Shaft bearings x2) Reinstallation When you install the roller, the long end [C] is at the rear. Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
Page 256: Lubricant Bar
August, 2006 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 3.7.5 LUBRICANT BAR B132R305.WMF Remove: Paper transfer unit ( 3.7.3) [A]: Entrance guide plate ( [B]: Lubrication bar ( Important! Work carefully to avoid scratching the paper transfer roller. Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
Page 257: Cleaning Blade
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.7.6 CLEANING BLADE B132R306.WMF Remove: Paper transfer unit ( 3.7.3) Lubrication bar ( 3.7.5) [A]: Cleaning blade ( Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4). 3-70...
Page 258: Ptr Cleaning Brush Roller
August, 2006 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 3.7.7 PTR CLEANING BRUSH ROLLER B132R307.WMF Remove: Paper transfer unit ( 3.7.3) Transfer exit guide, paper transfer roller ( 3.7.4) [A]: Gear ( [B]: Brush roller cover ( [C]: PTR cleaning brush roller (Gear x1, Washer x1, Shaft bearing x1) Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
Page 259: Paper Transport Belt, Separation Power Pack
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.7.8 PAPER TRANSPORT BELT, SEPARATION POWER PACK B132R308.WMF B132R308A.WMF Pull out the drawer unit ( 3.2.9) Remove: Paper transport unit lever and cover ( 3.7.3) Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) [A]: Timing belt x1, Gear x1, Shaft bearing x1 [B]: Clip ring x1, Shaft bearing [C]: Paper transport belt ( [D]: Cover...
Page 260: Registration Motor
August, 2006 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 3.7.9 REGISTRATION MOTOR B132R618.WMF Remove: Drawer unit ( 3.2.9) [A]: Drawer unit connector bracket ( [B]: Gear cover ( [C]: Registration gear ( x1, Spring pin x1) [D]: Registration motor assembly ( Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4).
Page 261: Double-Feed Detection Led
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.7.10 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION LED B132R619.WMF B132R620.WMF Remove: Drawer unit ( 3.2.9) Drawer unit connector bracket ( 3.7.9) Registration motor assembly ( 3.7.9) Sensor support plate ( 3.7.2) [A]: Upper stay ( x1, Gear x 1, Pin x1) [B]: Lower stay ( [C]: Sensor bracket ( [D]: Double-feed detection LED (...
Page 262: Image Transfer Unit
August, 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT 3.8 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT 3.8.1 ITB (Image Transfer Belt), BELT CLEANING UNIT B132R310.WMF Disassembly and ITB Replacement 1. Put a clean sheet of paper on a flat surface. 2. Remove the image transfer unit from the machine ( 3.2.8). Put the image transfer unit on the sheet of paper.
Page 263 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 B132R314.WMF Remove: [A]: Encoder sensor bracket ( [B]: Set the image transfer unit on its front side up. [C]: ID sensor / MUSIC sensor plate ( [D]: ITB Important When you install the new ITB, the edge of the belt with the encoder film strip must be at [E].
Page 264 August, 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT Reassembly of the Image Transfer Unit and Belt Cleaning Unit B132R315.WMF 1. Insert one sheet of A4/LT paper [A] at the corner as shown. : The paper protects the NOTE corner seal [B] of the belt cleaning unit.
Page 265 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 B132R317.WMF 5. Pull out the paper [A] slowly. 6. Check the paper. If the paper is unmarked, go to the next step. -or- If the paper is creased or torn, separate the image transfer belt and cleaning unit.
Page 266: Dusting The Itb With Lubricant Powder
BEFORE INSTALLING ITB. A NEW (B1329700) ( UBRICANT OWDER COMPOSED OF TEARATE IS SPECIALLY (e-STUDIO4500c/5500c). DESIGNED FOR THIS MACHINE (54429101) EVER USE ETTING OWDER FOR THIS MACHINE OR YOU MAY DAMAGE THE DRUM CHARGE ROLLER AND CAUSE PROBLEMS WITH IMAGE QUALITY...
Page 267 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 Important Be sure to apply powder until the ITB is completely covered. B132R319.WMF After covering the surface of the ITB with lubricant power, be sure to rotate the ITB through one full rotation in the opposite direction.
Page 268: Itb Cleaning Blade, Dust Collection Unit
August, 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT 3.8.2 ITB CLEANING BLADE, DUST COLLECTION UNIT B132R311.WMF B132R312A.WMF Remove: Image transfer unit ( 3.2.8) Belt cleaning unit ( 3.8.1) [A]: ITB cleaning blade ( [B]: Dust collection unit ( Reinstallation After reinstallation of the dust collection unit, confirm that the seal [C] is covered by the bracket [D].
Page 269: Itb Cleaning Roller, Scraper Blade
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.8.3 ITB CLEANING ROLLER, SCRAPER BLADE B132R313.WMF Remove: Image transfer unit, ITB cleaning unit ( 3.8.1) ITB cleaning blade, dust collection unit ( 3.8.2) [A]: Rear bracket, coupling ( [B]: Front bracket ( x1, Gear x1) [C]: ITB cleaning roller [D]: ITB cleaning scraper blade ( Reinstallation...
Page 270: Music And Id Sensors
August, 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT 3.8.4 MUSIC AND ID SENSORS B132R332.WMF Remove the ID sensor/music sensor plate ( 3.8.1) [A]: Cover ( [B]: Music and ID sensors ( Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4). 3-83...
Page 271: Image Transfer Power Pack
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT August, 2006 3.8.5 IMAGE TRANSFER POWER PACK B132R333.WMF Remove the ITB ( 3.8.1) [A]: Support bracket ( [B]: Small idle roller plate [C]: Large idle roller plate [D]: Image transfer power pack ( Reinstallation Connect the color coded connectors at the correction positions.
Page 272: Belt Position Sensors
August, 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT 3.8.6 BELT POSITION SENSORS B132R335.WMF Remove the ITB ( 3.8.1) [A]: Belt position sensor assembly ( Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 ( 3.19.4). 3-85...
Page 273: Fusing Belt Strippers
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9 FUSING UNIT 3.9.1 FUSING BELT STRIPPERS B132R403.WMF B132R402.WMF Pull out the drawer unit ( 3.2.9) [A]: Raise lever until it stops. [B]: Fusing cleaning unit cover ( [C]: Fusing unit exit guide ( [D]: Hot roller stripper Press the sides in to disconnect the strippers and remove.
Page 274: Fusing Unit
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT 3.9.2 FUSING UNIT B132R401.WMF 1. Turn the copier OFF and disconnect the power cord at the power source. 2. Open the front door. 3. Pull out the drawer unit. ( 3.2.9) 4. Allow the machine to cool for at least 10 minutes. 5.
Page 275: Fusing Exit Sensor, Accordion Jam Sensor
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9.3 FUSING EXIT SENSOR, ACCORDION JAM SENSOR B132R405.WMF Remove: Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) [A]: Sensor bracket ( [B]: Fusing exit sensor ( [C]: Accordion jam sensor ( 3-88...
Page 276: Pressure Roller Thermostats, Thermistor
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT 3.9.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTATS, THERMISTOR B132R407.WMF B132R410.WMF Remove: Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) [A]: Lower entrance guide cover ( [B]: Pressure roller thermostats ( [C]: Pressure roller thermistor ( 3-89...
Page 277: Fusing Cleaning Unit
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9.5 FUSING CLEANING UNIT B132R408.WMF Remove: Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) [A]: Fusing unit upper cover ( [B]: Fusing cleaning unit (Spring x1) 3-90...
Page 278: Fusing Belt Thermostats
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT 3.9.6 FUSING BELT THERMOSTATS B132R411.WMF Remove: Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) Fusing cleaning unit ( 3.9.5) [A]: Two left thermostats ( [B]: Two right thermostats ( NOTE: The thermostats, installed in line with one another, are of two types. One is marked with a red mark, but their order of installation is not important.
Page 279: Fusing Thermistors, Heating Roller Temperature Sensor
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9.7 FUSING THERMISTORS, HEATING ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSOR B132R409.WMF Remove: Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) Fusing unit upper cover ( 3.9.1) Fusing cleaning unit ( 3.9.5) [A]: Fusing unit belt cover ( [B]: Hot roller thermistor ( [C]: Heating roller thermistor ( [D]: Heating roller temperature sensor ( x2, Spring plates x2) [E]: Wire (...
Page 280: Fusing Belt Lubrication Roller, Cleaning Roller
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT 3.9.8 FUSING BELT LUBRICATION ROLLER, CLEANING ROLLER B132R404.WMF Remove: Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) Fusing cleaning unit ( 3.9.5) 1. Remove the fusing belt lubrication roller [A] (Springs x 2, Bushing x2, x2). 2. Remove the cleaning roller [B]. NOTE: Press on each end of the roller to release the springs [C].
Page 281: Pressure Roller Cleaning Felt Roller
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9.9 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING FELT ROLLER B132R406.WMF Remove: Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) [A]: Exit sensor bracket ( [B]: Lower exit guide assembly ( [C]: Lower exit guide ( [D]: Pressure roller strippers ( x7) [E]: Cleaning felt roller Assy 3-94...
Page 282 August, 2006 FUSING UNIT Remove: [E]: Cleaning felt roller Assy [F]: Cleaning felt roller [G]: Bracket [H]: Springs [I]: Bushings 3-95...
Page 283: Hot Roller, Heating Roller Fusing Lamps
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9.10 HOT ROLLER, HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMPS B132R413.WMF Remove: Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) Fusing unit upper cover ( 3.9.1) Fusing cleaning unit ( 3.9.5) [A]: Bracket [B]: Rear lamp bracket ( [C]: Front lamp brackets ( x1 each) 3-96...
Page 284 August, 2006 FUSING UNIT B132R414.WMF Important! Before disconnecting the lamps, mark the connectors to ensure that you match their connection points correctly at reinstallation. Disconnect at front and rear: [A]: Heating roller fusing lamp connectors ( [B]: Hot roller fusing lamp connectors ( Remove: [C]: Heating roller fusing lamps x2 [D]: Hot roller fusing lamp x1...
Page 285: Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9.11 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP B132R412.WMF Remove: Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) Fusing unit upper cover ( 3.9.1) Fusing cleaning unit ( 3.9.5) Brackets ( 3.9.10) [A]: Pressure roller lamp front bracket ( [B]: Pressure roller lamp rear bracket ( [C]: Pressure roller fusing lamp ( 3-98...
Page 286: Heating Roller, Fusing Belt, Hot Roller
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT 3.9.12 HEATING ROLLER, FUSING BELT, HOT ROLLER B132R415.WMF Remove: Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) Fusing unit upper cover ( 3.9.1) Fusing cleaning unit ( 3.9.5) Hot roller fusing lamp, heating roller fusing lamp (x3) ( 3.9.10) [A]: Release levers. Press down to release. 3-99...
Page 287 FUSING UNIT August, 2006 B132R416.WMF 1. Remove screws [A], [B], [C] ( x3). 2. Rotate the frame [D] to the right. 3. At the front and rear of the heating roller, remove: [E] Lock rings [F] Bushings [G] Bearings 4. Remove the heating roller [H] 5.
Page 288 August, 2006 FUSING UNIT Assembling procedure: Attach the fusing belt [L] and hot roller [M]. Attach the lock rings [I], shaft bearings [J] and gears [K] to the front and rear of the heating roller. NOTE: Make sure the bearing flange is on the outside. Attach the heating roller [H] (Length [N] >...
Page 289: Pressure Roller
FUSING UNIT August, 2006 3.9.13 PRESSURE ROLLER B132R417.WMF Remove: Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) Fusing unit upper cover ( 3.9.15) Fusing cleaning unit ( 3.9.5) Pressure roller fusing lamp (x1) ( 3.9.11) [A]: Lower fusing entrance guide ( [B]: Front screw ( [C]: Rear screw ( [D]: Hot roller fusing lamp ( x1), heating roller fusing lamps (...
Page 290: Pressure Roller Stripper
August, 2006 FUSING UNIT 3.9.14 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER B132R418.WMF Remove: Fusing unit ( 3.9.2) Lower exit guide assembly ( 3.9.9) [A]: Pressure roller strippers 3-103...
Page 291: Duplex Unit
DUPLEX UNIT August, 2006 3.10 DUPLEX UNIT 3.10.1 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR B132R500.WMF B132R504.WMF Pull out the duplex unit. [A]: Duplex unit front cover ( [B]: Duplex inverter motor ( x1, Timing belt x1, Gear x1) 3-104...
Page 292: Duplex Transport Motor
August, 2006 DUPLEX UNIT 3.10.2 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR B132R506.WMF Pull out the duplex unit. Release the lower guide plate with knob F. Remove: Duplex unit front cover ( 3.10.1) [A]: Duplex transport motor ( x1, Timing belt x 1) 3-105...
Page 293: Duplex Unit Sensors
DUPLEX UNIT August, 2006 3.10.3 DUPLEX UNIT SENSORS Duplex Entrance Sensor B132R502.WMF Pull out the duplex unit. Remove: [A]: Bracket ( x 2) [B]: Release harness clamp [C]: Duplex entrance sensor ( x 1) Reinstallation Insert the anti-static brushes into the roller holes. 3-106...
Page 294: Transport Sensor 1, 2, Inverter Exit Sensor
August, 2006 DUPLEX UNIT Transport Sensor 1, 2, Inverter Exit Sensor B132R503.WMF Remove the duplex unit ( 3.2.10) [A]: Inverter unit ( x1 front, x1 rear, [B]: Reverse trigger roller assembly (Rear: x1, Shaft bushing x1) (Front: Link gear x1, Spring x1, Shaft bushing x1) [C]: Plate ( [D]: Cross-stay ( x 4)
Page 295 DUPLEX UNIT August, 2006 B132R507.WMF [A]: Jogger fences ( x 1 ea.) [B]: Left transport cover ( x 2) The front screw is a shoulder screw. Insert the screws in the correct holes when re-attaching. To avoid breaking the tabs under the left edge of the table, pull the table to the right to disengage the tabs and then remove.
Page 296: Transport Sensor 3
August, 2006 DUPLEX UNIT Transport Sensor 3 B132R508.WMF Remove: [A]: Duplex unit front cover ( 3.10.1) [B]: Cross stay ( x 1) [C]: Right transport cover ( x 2, x 1) NOTE: The front screw is a shoulder screw. Insert the screws in the correct holes when re-attaching.
Page 297: Duplex Jogger Motor
DUPLEX UNIT August, 2006 3.10.4 DUPLEX JOGGER MOTOR B132R505.WMF Remove: [A]: Duplex unit front cover ( 3.10.1) [B]: Duplex jogger motor ( 3-110...
Page 298: Duplex Jogger Belt
August, 2006 DUPLEX UNIT 3.10.5 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT B140R819.WMF Remove: Remove the inverter unit ( 3.10.3) Cross stay ( 3.10.3) Reverse trigger roller assembly ( 3.10.3) Jogger fences ( 3.10.3) Left transport cover ( 3.10.3) Duplex jogger motor ( 3.10.4). 1.
Page 299: Tandem Tray
TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) August, 2006 3.11 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) 3.11.1 TANDEM TRAY B140R820.WMF B140R821.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Pull out the tandem tray drawer [A] completely to separate the left [B] and right [C] sides of the tandem tray. 3.
Page 300 August, 2006 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) B140R822.WMF B140R823.WMF [A]: Right tandem tray ( x 2). NOTE: 1) When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the wheels [B] ride on the slide rail [C]. 2) When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the tandem tray stopper [D] is set behind the stopper [E] on the frame.
Page 301: Rear Fence Return Sensor Replacement
TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) August, 2006 3.11.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT B132R623.WMF Pull out the tandem feed tray. [A]: Return sensor assembly ( x 1, x1). 3-114...
Page 302: Rear Fence Hp Sensor Replacement
August, 2006 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) 3.11.3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT B140R825.WMF Pull out the tandem feed tray. [A]: Rear bottom plate ( x 1). [B]: Back fence transport gear ( x 1) [C]: Move the back fence to the right. [D]: Rear fence HP sensor ( x 1) 3-115...
Page 303: Tandem Right Tray Paper Sensor Replacement
TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) August, 2006 3.11.4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT B140R826.WMF B140R827.WMF Remove the right tandem tray ( 3.11.1) [A]: Inner cover ( x 2) [B]: Side fences ( x 1 each) [C]: Bottom plate ( x 4) [D]: Connector ( x 1) [E]: Tandem right tray paper sensor (...
Page 304: Bottom Plate Lift Wire Replacement
August, 2006 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) 3.11.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT NOTE: Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom plate lift wire. It is necessary to remove the shaft for replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire. B140R828.WMF B140R829.WMF Remove the right tandem tray.
Page 305 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) August, 2006 B140R830.WMF NOTE: When re-installing the bottom plate lift wire: 1) Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B], and set the projection [C] in the hole [D]. 2) Position the wire as shown [E]. 3) Do not cross the wires.
Page 306: Tandem Tray Paper Size Change
August, 2006 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) 3.11.6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE At the factory, this tray is set up for A4 or LT LEF. Only A4 or LT LEF paper can be used for tandem feed. B140R832.WMF B140R831.WMF 1. Open the front cover. 2.
Page 307 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) August, 2006 B132R624.WMF B140R834.WMF Left Tray 6. Remove the tray cover [A] ( x 2). 7. Remove the DC motor cover [B] ( x 5). 8. Remove the rear side fence [C] and front side fence [D] ( x 4 ea.) 9.
Page 308 August, 2006 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) B132R836.WMF 11. Re-position the return position sensor bracket [A] ( x 1). For A4 set the screw in the left hole [B]. For LT set the screw in the right hole [C]. 12. Input the new paper size into SP5959 001. Reinstallation Do the scanner and registration adjustments (see section 3.19.1, 3.19.3).
Page 309: Paper Feed (Trays 2, 3)
PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3) August, 2006 3.12 PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3) 3.12.1 PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLERS B132R601.WMF [A]: Remove the tray. [B]: Feed roller ( x 1) [C]: Pick-up roller ( x 1) [D]: Separation roller ( x 1) Important The operation of the FRR mechanisms for the tandem tray (Tray 1), universal trays (Tray 2, Tray 3), bypass tray, and ARDF are similar.
Page 310: Feed Unit
August, 2006 PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3) 3.12.2 FEED UNIT B132R602A.WMF B132R603A.WMF Remove: Front door ( 3.2.4) If the LCT is connected, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine. LCT entrance guide cover and right lower cover Pull out all three trays (do not remove). [A]: Toner collection bottle [B]: Vertical transport guide [C]: Inner cover (...
Page 311 PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3) August, 2006 B132R625.WMF B132R604.WMF [A]: Guide plate ( x 1) 1st feed unit only. [B]: Feed unit ( x 1, x 3) Insert your hand from the right and pull the feed unit forward. NOTE: To avoid hitting the unit on the sides of the machine, remove it carefully and slowly.
Page 312: Separation Roller Pressure Adjustment
August, 2006 PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3) 3.12.3 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT The position of the drive gear for the separation roller can be changed in order to change the amount of pressure exerted by the separation roller. This adjustment can be done: When feeding special paper, especially thick paper When the customer is experiencing feed problems...
Page 313: Paper End, Tray Lift, Paper Feed Sensors
PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3) August, 2006 3.12.4 PAPER END, TRAY LIFT, PAPER FEED SENSORS B132R606.WMF Remove: Feed unit ( 3.12.2) [A]: Sensor bracket ( [B]: Paper end sensor ( [C]: Tray lift sensor ( [D]: Sensor bracket ( [E]: Paper feed sensor ( 3-126...
Page 314: Vertical Transport Sensor
August, 2006 PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3) 3.12.5 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR B132R607.WMF Remove: Feed unit ( 3.12.2) [A]: Bracket ( [B]: Upper unit ( [C]: Vertical transport sensor ( 3-127...
Page 315: Bypass Unit
BYPASS UNIT August, 2006 3.13 BYPASS UNIT 3.13.1 BYPASS PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLER B132R601A.WMF Remove right covers ( 3.2.5) Open the bypass tray Remove the bypass unit ( 3.13.3) Remove the upper unit cover ( 3.13.4) Remove: [A]: Pick-up roller ( [B]: Feed roller ( [C]: Separation roller ( 3-128...
Page 316: Bypass Auto Paper Size Detection Switches
August, 2006 BYPASS UNIT 3.13.2 BYPASS AUTO PAPER SIZE DETECTION SWITCHES B132R610.WMF Remove right covers ( 3.2.5) Open the bypass tray Disconnect: [A]: Front hinge [B]: Rear hinge Remove: [C]: Bypass tray ( [D]: Bypass table ( Pawls x2) B132R611.WMF [E]: Paper size detection board (Pawl x1, 3-129...
Page 317: Bypass Unit
BYPASS UNIT August, 2006 3.13.3 BYPASS UNIT B132R626.WMF Remove right covers ( 3.2.5) Open the bypass tray Remove: [A]: Bypass unit ( 3-130...
Page 318: Bypass Paper End Sensor, Feed Sensor
August, 2006 BYPASS UNIT 3.13.4 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR, FEED SENSOR B132R613.WMF Remove: Bypass unit ( 3.13.3) [A]: Unit upper cover (Release x1) [B]: Bypass paper end sensor ( [C]: Feed sensor ( 3-131...
Page 319: Bypass Feed Clutch
BYPASS UNIT August, 2006 3.13.5 BYPASS FEED CLUTCH B132R614.WMF Remove: Bypass unit ( 3.13.3) [A]: Bypass feed clutch ( Reinstallation Make sure the arm [B] fits correctly into the notch bracket [C] of the clutch. 3-132...
Page 320: Boards
August, 2006 BOARDS 3.14 BOARDS 3.14.1 CONTROLLER UNIT B132R710.WMF CAUTION Before you start this procedure, turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord. Remove [A]: Disconnect the ARDF [B]: Controller unit ( 3-133...
Page 321: Controller Board, 256 Mb Memory, Nvram
BOARDS August, 2006 3.14.2 CONTROLLER BOARD, 256 MB MEMORY, NVRAM B132R712.WMF B132R711.WMF Important: If you are going to replace the NVRAM, follow the procedure on the next page and refer to these illustrations as necessary. Do not remove the NVRAM until you have uploaded is contents. (For more, see the procedures on the following page.) Always touch a metal surface to discharge any static on your hands before you touch the controller board.
Page 322: Nvram Replacement
August, 2006 BOARDS 3.14.3 NVRAM REPLACEMENT Upload NVRAM Data SD Card 1. Do SP5990 001 to print the SMC report. 2. Turn the copier main power switch off. 3. Insert an SD card in Slot 3 4. Execute SP5824 to upload the data to the SD card. 5.
Page 323: Controller Box Cover, Bicu, Iob
BOARDS August, 2006 3.14.4 CONTROLLER BOX COVER, BICU, IOB B132R706.WMF Remove: Rear covers ( 3.2.6) [A]: Controller box cover ( x17) [B]: IOB ( x20, [C]: BICU ( x11, B132R714.WMF 3-136...
Page 324 August, 2006 BOARDS NOTE: When you replace the BICU, make sure that the DIP switches are set to the correct positions. 120V machines: Make sure only DIP switch #1 is ON. 220/230/240V machines: Make sure only DIP switch #2 is ON. Example: A 220/230/240V machine (only DIP SW #2 is ON, the others are OFF).
Page 325: Rds Board, Jumper
BOARDS August, 2006 3.14.5 RDS BOARD, JUMPER B132R709.WMF Remove: Controller unit ( 3.14.1) Interface board ( 3.14.6) [A]: RDS board ( [B]: Jumper 3-138...
Page 326: Interface Board, Mother Board
August, 2006 BOARDS 3.14.6 INTERFACE BOARD, MOTHER BOARD B132R708.WMF B132R713.WMF 1. Remove the controller unit. ( 3.14.4) 2. Remove the RAPI EXT board [A] ( 3. Remove the HDD. ( 3.15) 4. Remove the mother board [B] ( x12) 3-139...
Page 327: Hvps, Pfc Board
BOARDS August, 2006 3.14.7 HVPS, PFC BOARD B132R720.WMF Remove the rear lower cover ( 3.2.6) Remove: [A]: HVPS and PFC board assembly ( x22, x10, x23) [B]: HVPS ( [C]: PFC board ( 3-140...
Page 328 August, 2006 BOARDS 3.14.8 PSU B132R722.WMF Remove the rear covers ( 3.2.6) Remove: HVPS, PFC board assembly ( 3.14.7) [A]: PSU ( 3-141...
Page 329: Ac Drive Board
BOARDS August, 2006 3.14.9 AC DRIVE BOARD B132R727.WMF Remove left lower cover. ( 3.2.3) [A]: AC drive board ( 3-142...
Page 330: Transfer Motor, Drive, Drive Motor Boards
August, 2006 BOARDS 3.14.10 TRANSFER MOTOR, DRIVE, DRIVE MOTOR BOARDS B132R716.WMF Remove rear covers ( 3.2.6) Open and lock the controller box ( 3.2.11) [A]: Board assembly ( x21, [B]: DRB (Drive Board) [C]: TMB (Transfer Motor Board) [D]: DMB (Drive Motor Board) 3-143...
Page 331: Hdd Unit
HDD UNIT August, 2006 3.15 HDD UNIT B132R707.WMF Important The HDD unit contains four separate hard disks. However, the four disks are always replaced together as a unit. Never attempt to replace a single disk. Remove: Rear covers ( 3.2.6) Controller box cover ( 3.14.4) [A]: HDD unit ( Important...
Page 332: Disposal Of Hdd Units
August, 2006 HDD UNIT Disposal of HDD Units Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client. If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the HDD, the HDD must remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping. The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information.
Page 333: Motors
MOTORS August, 2006 3.16 MOTORS 3.16.1 PCU MOTOR, DRUM MOTOR B132I718A.WMF 1. Remove the rear covers. ( 3.2.6) 2. Open and lock the controller box. ( 3.2.11) 3. Remove the PCU stand [A] stored under the machine. 4. Remove the drum motor shaft tool [B] (shorter tool) from the bottom of the PCU stand.
Page 334 August, 2006 MOTORS B132R724.WMF 5. Remove the PCU motor [A] ( x4). 6. Open the front door. 7. Remove the toner hopper. ( 3.2.7) Important: Make sure the toner hopper slide rails are pushed into the machine. 8. At the front of the machine, attach the short tool [B] to the shaft of the drum motor to be removed.
Page 335: Paper Transfer Motor
MOTORS August, 2006 3.16.2 PAPER TRANSFER MOTOR B132R717.WMF Remove rear covers ( 3.2.6) Open and lock controller box ( 3.2.11) [A]: Paper transfer motor ( 3-148...
Page 336: Image Transfer Motor
August, 2006 MOTORS 3.16.3 IMAGE TRANSFER MOTOR B132R718.WMF Remove rear covers ( 3.2.6) Open and lock controller box ( 3.2.11) Remove the image transfer board assembly ( 3.14.10) [A]: Image transfer motor (Spring x1, x3, Timing belt x1, Gear x1) 3-149...
Page 337: Waste Toner Transport Motor, Waste Toner Distribution Motor
MOTORS August, 2006 3.16.4 WASTE TONER TRANSPORT MOTOR, WASTE TONER DISTRIBUTION MOTOR B132R721.WMF Remove rear covers ( 3.2.6) Open and lock the controller box ( 3.2.11) Remove the HVPS and PFC board assembly ( 3.14.7) [A]: Waste toner motor assembly ( [B]: Waste toner transport motor ( [C]: Waste toner distribution motor ( 3-150...
Page 338: Bottom Plate Lift Motor (Trays 1, 2, 3)
August, 2006 MOTORS 3.16.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR (TRAYS 1, 2, 3) B132R723A.WMF Remove the rear covers ( 3.2.6) Open the controller box and lock it ( 3.2.11) Remove HVPS and PFC board assembly ( 3.14.7) Remove PSU ( 3.14.8) Tray 1 [A]: Bracket ( [B]: Bottom plate lift motor –...
Page 339: Itb Drive Motor
MOTORS August, 2006 3.16.6 ITB DRIVE MOTOR B132R719A.WMF B132R725.WMF Remove rear covers ( 3.2.6) Open and lock the controller box ( 3.2.11) Remove the Transfer board assembly ( 3.14.10) [A]: Support stay ( x21, [B]: ITB drive motor ( 3-152...
Page 340: Air Filters
August, 2006 AIR FILTERS 3.17 AIR FILTERS 3.17.1 TONER HOPPER FILTER B132R212.WMF Remove: Toner hopper ( 3.2.7) Motor cover ( 3.6.5) [A]: Toner hopper filter 3-153...
Page 341: Ozone Filter, Dust Filters
AIR FILTERS August, 2006 3.17.2 OZONE FILTER, DUST FILTERS B132R729.WMF Remove: [A]: Cover ( [B]: Inner cover [C]: Dust filters x3 [D]: Ozone filter Reinstallation Make sure you install the filters as shown. If you do not, you cannot reattach the cover [B].
Page 342: Scanner Filter
August, 2006 AIR FILTERS 3.17.3 SCANNER FILTER B132R730.WMF Remove: [A]: Top left cover ( [B]: Scanner filter 3-155...
Page 343: Ardf
ARDF August, 2006 3.18 ARDF 3.18.1 ARDF COVERS B132R104.WMF [A]: Open the feed cover. [B]: Front cover ( x 3, Tabs x4). Press down the tabs. [C]: Rear cover ( x 2, Tabs x2). Press down the tabs. 3-156...
Page 344: Original Feed Unit
August, 2006 ARDF 3.18.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT B132R105.WMF [A]: Open the feed cover. [B]: Remove the snap fitting. [C]: Pull toward you slightly to disconnect the rear end of the shaft [D]: Disconnect the front end of the shaft. 3-157...
Page 345: Feed Belt, Pick-Up Roller
ARDF August, 2006 3.18.3 FEED BELT, PICK-UP ROLLER Remove: Original Feed unit ( 3.18.2) [A]: E-ring [B]: Cover [C]: Slide bushings out Reassembly Make sure that the tab on the front guide plate is above the pick-up roller unit [D]. B132R106.WMF [E]: Feed belt holder [F]: Feed belt...
Page 346: Bottom Plate Position Sensor
August, 2006 ARDF 3.18.4 BOTTOM PLATE POSITION SENSOR B132R117.WMF Remove: Remove front cover ( 3.18.1) Original feed unit ( 3.18.2) [A]: Pin screw x1 [B]: Raise the bottom plate [C]: Bottom plate position sensor ( x1). 3-159...
Page 347: Interval, Original Width, Skew Correction Separation Sensors
ARDF August, 2006 3.18.5 INTERVAL, ORIGINAL WIDTH, SKEW CORRECTION, SEPARATION SENSORS B132R110.WMF [A]: Open the feed cover. [B]: Guide plate ( x 3). [C]: Width sensor bracket ( x 2) [D]: Original width sensors ( x 5) [E]: Interval sensor ( x 1) [F]: Skew correction sensor ( x 1)
Page 348: Original Length Sensors
August, 2006 ARDF 3.18.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS B132R109A.WMF Remove: Front, rear covers ( 3.18.1) Clip rings ( x2). [A]: Remove the original tray [B]: Lower cover ( [C]: Original length sensors: B5 original length ( A4 original length ( LG original length ( B132R109B.WMF 3-161...
Page 349 ARDF August, 2006 3.18.7 FEED COVER, ORIGINAL SET, BOTTOM PLATE, PICK-UP ROLLER HP, UPPER INVERTER SENSORS B132R116.WMF Remove: Front, rear covers ( 3.18.1) [A]: Original tray ( x2, Bushings x2) [B]: Lift tray ( x1, Pin screw x1) 3-162...
Page 350 August, 2006 ARDF B132R118.WMF [A]: Original set sensor ( [B]: Upper inverter sensor ( [C]: Feed cover sensor ( [D]: Pick-up roller HP sensor ( [E]: Bottom plate position sensor ( 3-163...
Page 351: Ardf Position Sensor, Aps Start Sensor
ARDF August, 2006 3.18.8 ARDF POSITION SENSOR, APS START SENSOR B132R125.WMF [A]: Raise the ARDF to the vertical position. Remove: [B]: APS bracket ( [C]: ARDF position sensor ( [D]: APS start sensor ( 3-164...
Page 352: Original Registration, Exit Sensors
August, 2006 ARDF 3.18.9 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION, EXIT SENSORS B132R112.WMF Remove the front and rear covers ( 3.18.1) Remove the original feed unit ( 3.18.2) [A]: Rotate the inverter guide 180 degrees. [B]: Original guide plate ( x4). 3-165...
Page 353 ARDF August, 2006 B132R113.WMF Remove: [A]: Bracket ( [B]: Original registration sensor [C]: Bracket ( [D]: Original exit sensor ( B132R115.WMF 3-166...
Page 354: Ardf Separation Roller
August, 2006 ARDF 3.18.10 ARDF SEPARATION ROLLER B132R108.WMF Open the feed cover Remove the original feed unit. ( 3.18.2) Remove: [A]: Separation roller cover. Use the tip of a small flathead screwdriver. [B]: Separation roller ( x 1) [C]: Torque limiter 3-167...
Page 355: Ardf Transport Belt
ARDF August, 2006 3.18.11 ARDF TRANSPORT BELT Removing the ARDF Transport Belt Assembly B132R102.WMF B132R126.WMF 1. Open the feed cover. ( 3.18.1) 2. Remove the ARDF front cover. ( 3.18.1) 3. Raise the ARDF [A] to the vertical position. 4. Pull off the white cover [B] (Velcro fasteners) 5.
Page 356: Removing The Belt
August, 2006 ARDF Removing the Belt B132R127.WMF 1. Remove the front plastic cover [A] ( 2. Remove the rear plastic cover [B] ( 3. Loosen front lock screw [C]. Do not remove. 4. Loosen rear lock screw [D]. Do not remove. This releases the spring-loaded tension on the belt.
Page 357 ARDF August, 2006 B132R139.WMF 8. Remove the Teflon sleeve [A]. 9. Push the rear shaft bearing [B] out of its bracket. 10. Push the front shaft bearing [C] out of its bracket. 11. Push the front end of the shaft [D] over the top of the bracket. 12.
Page 358: Reinstalling The Belt
August, 2006 ARDF Reinstalling the Belt 1. Remove the ARDF front cover [A] ( 3.18.1) 2. Take out the special tool [B]. ( NOTE: The special tool [B] is attached to the front side plate. It is used to adjust the tension on the belt on both ends of the shaft.
Page 359: Reattaching The White Cover
ARDF August, 2006 B132R103.WMF Reattaching the White Cover 1. With its white side down, set the cover [A] on the exposure glass. 2. Make sure the upper left corner is aligned with the arrow at the corner of the exposure glass. 3.
Page 360: Ardf Control Board
August, 2006 ARDF 3.18.12 ARDF CONTROL BOARD B132R124.WMF Remove: ARDF Rear cover ( 3.18.1) [A]: ARDF control board ( x17, 3-173...
Page 361: Ardf Bottom Plate Lift Motor
ARDF August, 2006 3.18.13 ARDF BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR B132R121.WMF Open the feed cover. Remove: ARDF rear cover ( 3.18.1) [A]: ARDF bottom plate lift motor ( x2, Timing belt x1) 3-174...
Page 362: Ardf Feed Motor, Ardf Transport Motor
August, 2006 ARDF 3.18.14 ARDF FEED MOTOR, ARDF TRANSPORT MOTOR B132R123.WMF Open the feed cover Remove the ARDF rear cover ( 3.18.1) Important! The feed motor must be removed before the transport motor. [A]: Screw ( [B]: Feed motor bracket ( x1, Timing belt x1, Spring x1) [C]: Feed motor ( [D]: Transport motor bracket (...
Page 363: Ardf Pick-Up Roller Lift Motor
ARDF August, 2006 3.18.15 ARDF PICK-UP ROLLER LIFT MOTOR B132R120.WMF Open the feed cover. Remove: ARDF rear cover ( 3.18.1) [A]: Pick-up roller lift motor ( x1, Timing belt x1) 3-176...
Page 364: Image Adjustments
August, 2006 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS 3.19 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS 3.19.1 SCANNING Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing registration, side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment. Use a C-4 test chart to perform the following adjustments. Scanner sub-scan magnification 1.
Page 365: Main Scan Dot Position Correction
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS August, 2006 Main scan dot position correction Adjust the printer registration before adjusting the scanner. 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Open SP4010 and SP4011. 3. Make sure that each value is equal to the factory default. 4. Press [COPY Window] and copy the C-4 chart in the full-color photo mode. NOTE: Be sure to copy in the photo mode.
Page 366: Ardf Side-To-Side And Leading Edge Registration
August, 2006 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS 3.19.2 ARDF ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration A: Leading edge registration B146R964.WMF B: Side-to-side registration B146R965.WMF Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper. 1. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF table and make a copy. 2.
Page 367: Registration
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS August, 2006 3.19.3 REGISTRATION Image Area The image area must be configured Feed direction correctly. Adjust the registration within the adjustment standard range as described below. Image Area B146R966.WMF A = B = C = 4.2 mm (1.6") Leading Edge Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.
Page 368: Adjustment Procedure
August, 2006 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS Adjustment Procedure 1. Enter SP mode and open SP2109. 2. Print Pattern 10. NOTE: Print several printing patterns and average the measured values of the leading edge and side-to-side registration values. 3. Do the leading edge registration adjustment. Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1001.
Page 369: Color Registration
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS August, 2006 3.19.4 COLOR REGISTRATION Forced MUSIC Adjustment The line position adjustment optimizes the quality of color prints. You can do forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001: We recommend that you do the forced MUSIC adjustment at the customer location immediately after installation, or after servicing or adjusting any parts or components of the following units: Around the drum...
Page 370: Skew Adjustment After Laser Unit Replacement
August, 2006 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS 3.19.5 SKEW ADJUSTMENT AFTER LASER UNIT REPLACEMENT To Print the Trim Pattern: 1. Do SP2109 002 (Test Pattern – Select Pattern) and select pattern 10. 2. Press the [Execute] on the display. 3. Press the [Copy Screen] on the display to switch to the normal copier screen. 4.
Page 371 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS August, 2006 Boss-1 Boss-2 Laser Unit (Top View) Rear Left Right Front Laser Unit (Front View) Left Right LE: Leading Edge Bottom TE: Trailing Edge Correct Pattern Paper feed direction B132R902.WMF To Adjust the Pattern Output: 1. Remove the exposure glass. ( 3.3.1) 2.
Page 372: Printer Gamma Correction
August, 2006 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS 3.19.6 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION ACC adjustment done at installation is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance for optimum performance. Printer gamma correction is required for fine adjustment to meet a customer requirement. The printer gamma curve created during ACC can be modified with SP modes. The gamma data for highlight, middle, shadow areas, and ID max can be adjusted.
Page 373 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS August, 2006 Adjustment Procedure 1. Copy the C-4 chart in mode that you want to adjust. 2. Enter the SP mode. 3. Press “Copy SP.” 4. Open SP4918 009. 5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard. (Refer the tables below.) Important Never change “Option”...
Page 374 August, 2006 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS - Photo Mode, Single Color - Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard ID max: Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart. Middle (Middle ID) Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches...
Page 375 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS August, 2006 - Text (Letter) Mode, Single Color - Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard ID max: Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart. Middle (Middle ID) Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches...
Page 376: Printer Mode
August, 2006 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS Printer Mode There are six adjustable modes. Select these modes with in the Printer SP mode with SP1102 001: 1200 x 1200 photo mode 600 x 600 text mode 1800 x 600 text mode 600 x 600 photo mode 1800 x 600 photo mode 1200 x 1200 text mode Highlight...
Page 377: Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS August, 2006 Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction The following tables show the adjustment reference for gamma correction. The tables show the level of the color scale on the C-4 test chart and on the tone control test sheet printed in the printer SP mode. For example, for K at text mode, grade 12 on the tone control test sheet should be the same as grade 7 on the C-4 chart.
Page 378: Touch Screen Calibration
August, 2006 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION 3.20 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION After clearing memory, or if the touch screen detection function is not working correctly, calibrate the touch screen. Important Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for design use only.
Page 379: Troubleshooting
April, 2007 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD 4. TROUBLESHOOTING 4.1 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD 4.1.1 OVERVIEW Here are some important points to keep in mind when downloading software: If an error interrupts download processing, the machine cannot operate normally with the program software only partially downloaded. When download processing execution starts, “Downloading…”...
Page 380: Download Error Codes
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD April, 2007 4.1.3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES Display Details Recovery Reboot after Controller ROM update error 1 Use the correct card SD card insert E01 When the update break data is stored in NVRAM, the break module information and the decompression module capable of Module ID Card No.
Page 381 April, 2007 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD Display Details Recovery Download Error E22 System error 3 (+SC991) Cycle the machine Module ID OFF/ON and re-try. Data fails to decompress. Card Card No xx/xx defective. Replace card Replace controller board SC991 System error 4 Cycle the machine OFF/ON and re-try Replace the controller...
Page 382 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD April, 2007 Display Details Recovery Download Error E42 Download result failure 3 Cycle the machine Module ID OFF/ON and re-try Operation panel or language download Card No. xx/xx failed. For this error, sometimes the message may not be displayed. Download Error E43 Download result failure 4 Cycle the machine...
Page 383: Important Sp Codes
April, 2007 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD 4.1.4 IMPORTANT SP CODES Here is a list of important SP codes that you may need during troubleshooting. SP5802 Free Run Mode Execute this SP to force base engine to run in the free run mode for testing. SP5803 Input Check Displays the signals received from sensors and...
Page 384: Special Procedures
SPECIAL PROCEDURES April, 2007 4.2 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 4.2.1 SP2181 030 (ALIGNMENT RESULT) ERRORS After SP2181 030 executes normally, you should see: If you see any number other than a "1", this indicates an error. Code Error Problem Recovery None Default display. None No action required.
Page 385 April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES Code Error Problem Recovery 21-23 Auto density out of range (over ITB misaligned Reinstall ITB. or lower) Image density too light, uneven. Output a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern 1. Check the images. Connector loose. Check the ID sensor and its connection.
Page 386 SPECIAL PROCEDURES April, 2007 Code Error Problem Recovery Time out of detecting MUSIC ITB misaligned Reinstall ITB. pattern. SP2153 023 set to 1 (OFF). Set SP2153 023 to 0 (ON). The settings of sensor lights 1, 2, 3 are different from the default setting, which is 2050.
Page 387 April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES Image Position Adjustment A MUSIC error occurs when a large amount of skew occurs beyond the acceptable range, or when the K sensor is out of position. Such errors can be corrected manually to correct skew. However, these adjustments cannot correct problems caused by physical damage to the ITB, filming, density degradation, or a dirty sensor.
Page 388: Color Registration Adjustment
SPECIAL PROCEDURES April, 2007 4.2.2 COLOR REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT Color Registration Error Correction 1. Start SP 2109 002 and select pattern 1 (1-dot line), then push the “OK” button. 2. Push the “Copy Window” button. Then select A3/DLT paper, and push the “Start”...
Page 389 April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 4. Correct the errors in the vertical lines (this corrects errors in the main scan direction). See the following table for how to do this. NOTE: In the table, a dotted line indicates a colored line (C, M, or Y). For example, the first row of the table shows you how to adjust the machine if a colored line is to the right of the black line on the test pattern.
Page 390 SPECIAL PROCEDURES April, 2007 Color Skew Error Correction 1. Start SP 2109 002 and select pattern 1 (1-dot line), then push the “OK” button. 2. Push the “Copy Window” button. Then select A3/DLT paper, and push the “Start” button to print the pattern. NOTE: Make sure that “Full Color Mode”...
Page 391 April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES Overall Check 1. After you do the color registration error and color skew corrections, do a forced MUSIC again, with SP 2111 001. 2. Do SP 2109 002 and print pattern 1 (1-dot line) on A3/DLT paper again. Check the skew and color registration.
Page 392 SPECIAL PROCEDURES April, 2007 B132R942.WMF When viewed through the lupe, the grid lines on the left and right side should be perfectly aligned (Good) and not misaligned (No-Good). 4. If the lines are misaligned (No-Good), use the lupe to measure distance between the black vertical lines and each of the colored vertical lines (C, M, Y).
Page 393 April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 4.2.3 SP3812 001 (DevSetup Execute) ERRORS After SP3812 001 executes normally, you should see four 1s: 1111 Reading from left to right, each "1" indicates the status of the PCUs: K, M, C, Y. If you see any number other than a "1", this indicates an error. SP3812 001 Error Codes Code Error...
Page 394: Process Control Troubleshooting
SPECIAL PROCEDURES April, 2007 4.2.4 PROCESS CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING Summary of Process Control SC Codes This is a list of SC codes that may occur during process control. For more, please refer to the process control tables on the following pages. Pre-Processing Check SC316 to SC319 Vpp is not within the normal range (Vpp: the AC current applied to the...
Page 395 April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES Process Control Self-Check: SP3821 After the process control self-check is executed manually with SP3820, you can execute SP3821 to check the results of the self-check. The possible error codes are listed in the "Displayed Code" column in the table below. When you do SP3821, the normal display (no errors) will look like this: 10101010 Reading from left to right each "10"...
Page 396 SPECIAL PROCEDURES April, 2007 General Displayed Item Major Cause Action Code Normal Successful V0 (SP3571) above –700V, or Potential VdHome Error Do SP2260 001 to check the function of the potential sensor. Sensors VdHome (SP3572) above –700V. Do SP2261 to check the Vd, Voffset readings. For more, see The window of the potential Section 6.
Page 397 April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES General Displayed Item Major Cause Action Code ID Sensor Vsg_reg (SP3121) less than 0.5V. Remove the ITB unit. Output Error ID sensor harness loose, Check the ID sensor harness connections and make sure that they disconnected, damaged are tight.
Page 398 SPECIAL PROCEDURES April, 2007 General Displayed Item Major Cause Action Code ID Sensor Development Development gamma (SP3561) Switch the machine OFF and ON then do SP3820 002. Pattern Gamma Error greater than 6.0 (mg/cm /-kV). Do SP3561 005 to 008 to confirm that development gamma is within Detection the target range (-0.15 to +0.25) If not within the target range, do the procedure again.
Page 399 April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES General Displayed Item Major Cause Action Code Development Development gamma (SP3561) 1. Do SP2109 002 and select Pattern 12. Gamma Error less than 0.3 (mg/cm /-kV) 2. Do SP2109 005 to 008 and change the settings of these SP codes from 63 (default) to 0.
Page 400 SPECIAL PROCEDURES April, 2007 General Displayed Item Major Cause Action Code Potential LD Failure A laser diode failed to fire and 1. Copy the color test pattern to determine which color is abnormal. Adjustment write the ID sensor pattern. 2. Turn the machine OFF. 3.
Page 401: Color Adjustment For Connected Copiers
April, 2007 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 4.2.5 COLOR ADJUSTMENT FOR CONNECTED COPIERS This procedure may be required for copiers after they are connected with the Copy Connector (B328). Do this procedure only if you or the customer notices that the color quality between the two copiers is different. The scanner gamma curve and printer gamma curve are adjusted at the factory for each machine.
Page 402 SPECIAL PROCEDURES April 2007 To adjust the main machine: 1. Place the test charge Connection Kit Color Test Chart (P/N VSST9501) on the exposure glass, with the arrow mark on the chart aligned with the left rear corner. 2. Do SP4954 001 (Read/Restore Std) and press [Execute]. After about 10 seconds, the "Completed"...
Page 403: Service Call Conditions
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4.3.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the service engineer cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
Page 404: Series Service Call Conditions
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 4.3.2 SERIES SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS There are 4 levels of service call conditions. Level Definition Reset Procedure Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation Enter SP mode, then turn the panel. The machine is disabled. The operator main power switch OFF and cannot reset the SC.
Page 405: Sc Code Descriptions
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4.3.3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS Important If a problem concerns a circuit board, disconnect and reconnect the connectors and then test the machine. Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause of the problem. Always do this before you decide to replace the PCB. If a motor lock error occurs, check the mechanical load before you decide to replace the motor or sensors.
Page 406: Sc Codes Group 1: Scanning
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC codes Group 1: Scanning SC101 Exposure lamp error The white level peak did not Dirty optics reach the prescribed threshold Exposure lamp defective when the white plate was Exposure lamp does not turn ON scanned.
Page 407 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC144 SBU (Sensor Board Unit) communication error When the machine is switched Dirty exposure glass or optics ON, or when the machine SBU board defective returns to full operation from the SBU harness disconnected, defective energy save mode, the machine can not access the SBU register, or the SBU register values are...
Page 408: Sc Codes Group 2: Exposure
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC codes Group 2: Exposure SC202 Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout The polygon mirror motor does Harness to polygon motor driver board not reach the targeted operating disconnected, defective speed: Polygon motor defective Within 10 seconds after Polygon motor driver board defective turning ON.
Page 409 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC220 Laser Synchronization Detector Error 1: K Leading Edge: LD0 While the polygon motor is Harness between the laser synchronizing rotating normally, no detector and I/F unit is disconnected, synchronizing detection signal is defective output for LD0 black, or leading Laser synchronizing detector defective edge, even after the laser diode Beam not reflected in photo detection...
Page 410 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC224 Laser Synchronization Detector Error 1: M Leading Edge: LD0 While the polygon motor is Harness between the laser synchronizing rotating normally, no detector and I/F unit is disconnected, synchronizing detection signal is defective output for LD0 magenta, leading Laser synchronizing detector defective edge, even after the laser diode Beam not reflected in photo detection...
Page 411 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC230 FGATE error 1: Feedback remains HIGH for K write After the start of timing to create GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective the black image, the PFGATE PCI I/F on the IPU defective register of the GAVD (ASIC) ASIC on the IOB defective does not assert, even after 5 Controller board disconnected, defective...
Page 412 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC233 FGATE error 1: Feedback remains LOW for Y write After the start of timing to create GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective the yellow image, the PFGATE PCI I/F on the IPU defective register of the GAVD (ASIC) ASIC on the IOB defective does not assert, even after 5 Check board connections, replace...
Page 413 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC236 FGATE error 1: Feedback remains HIGH for C write After the start of timing to create GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective the cyan image, the PFGATE PCI I/F on the IPU defective register of the GAVD (ASIC) ASIC on the IOB defective does not assert, even after 5 Controller board disconnected, defective...
Page 414 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC268 Optical unit sensor error At power ON, one of the two Thermistor disconnected (causes temperature sensors in the extremely low temperature reading) optics unit detected a Thermistor damaged and short circuited temperature lower than 0 C for (causes extremely high temperature more than 1 sec.
Page 415: Sc Codes Group 3: Image Development - 1
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC codes Group 3: Image Development - 1 SC300 AC charge output error 1: K SC301 AC charge output error 2: M SC302 AC charge output error 3: C SC303 AC charge output error 4: Y An interrupt checks the status of High voltage power supply the power pack every 2 ms.
Page 416 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC320 Development power pack error 1: K SC321 Development power pack error 2: M SC322 Development power pack error 3: C SC323 Development power pack error 4: Y An interrupt checks the status of Development power pack defective the each power pack every 2 High voltage power supply defective ms.
Page 417 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC336 Developer set error 1: K SC337 Developer set error 2: M SC338 Developer set error 3: C SC339 Developer set error 4: Y The value of Vcnt is set at the Film seal not removed from the black, maximum or minimum setting magenta, cyan, or yellow developer case when the TD sensor is...
Page 418 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC360 TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: K SC361 TD sensor (Vt high) error 2: M SC362 TD sensor (Vt high) error 3: C SC363 TD sensor (Vt high) error 4: Y The Vt value of the black, Black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor disconnected...
Page 419 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC372 TD sensor adjustment error 1: K SC373 TD sensor adjustment error 2: M SC374 TD sensor adjustment error 3: C SC375 TD sensor adjustment error 4: Y During TD sensor initialization Film seal not removed from a new with SP3801, the output value of developer pack the black, magenta, cyan, or...
Page 420: Sc Codes Group 4: Image Development - 2
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC codes Group 4: Image Development - 2 SC400 ID sensor error 1: Calibration Before adjustment Vsg_reg<0.5 but ID sensor harness disconnected, Vsg_reg could not be adjusted to the loose, defective target Vsg_reg = 4.0 0.2V during ID sensor dirty process control.
Page 421 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC420 Potential sensor error 1: Vd Adjustment K SC421 Potential sensor error 2: Vd Adjustment M SC422 Potential sensor error 3: Vd Adjustment C SC423 Potential sensor error 4: Vd Adjustment Y The development potential of Toner density low the drum before exposure (Vd) cannot be adjusted to within...
Page 422 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC440 Image transfer power pack error 1: K SC441 Image transfer power pack error 2: M SC442 Image transfer power pack error 3: C SC443 Image transfer power pack error 4: Y An interrupt checks the status of Transfer belt damaged, insulation the power pack every 2 ms.
Page 423 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC460 Separation power pack output error An interrupt checks the status of Damaged insulation on the high-voltage the power pack every 2 ms. This supply cable SC is issued if the BICU detects Damaged insulation around the high- a short in the power pack 250 voltage power supply.
Page 424 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC496 MUSIC sensor error The MUSIC sensor detected an MUSIC sensor defective or disconnected abnormal pattern on the ITB MUSIC pattern abnormal; do a forced because: process control (SP3821) and check the result (section 4.2.4). A/D converter exceeded upper or lower limit.
Page 425: Sc Codes Group 5: Paper Feed
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC codes Group 5: Paper Feed SC501 Tray 1 (tandem tray) feed error (Japan Only) The tray 1 lift sensor does not Tray lift motor harness disconnected, switch ON 10 s after the tray loose, defective lift motor switches ON and Paper or other obstacle trapped between starts lifting the bottom plate.
Page 426 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC505 Tandem tray rear fence motor error The return sensor does not Rear fence motor defective or poor switch ON within 10 sec. after connection the rear fence motor switches Paper or other obstacle interfering with operation of the sensors The HP sensor does not Paper or other obstacle trapped between...
Page 427 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC515 Duplex jogger motor error 1 When the jogger fence moves to Rear fence motor defective or poor the home position, the jogger connection fence HP sensor does not switch Paper or other obstacle interfering with on even after the duplex jogger operation of the sensors or motor motor has moved the jogger...
Page 428 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC533 Fan error 4: fusing exhaust fan The lock signal remained HIGH for 5 sec. Motor overload due to while the fan that draws air out of the fusing obstacle interfering with unit was operating. operation of the fan Fan harness loose, disconnected, defective...
Page 429 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC543 Heating roller thermistor 1 error 3: Software - High temperature The thermistor detected a TRIAC short temperature over 230 C. IOB defective BICU defective Fusing temperature out of control Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code. SC544 Heating roller thermistor 1 error 4: Hardware - High temperature The thermistor detected a...
Page 430 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC548 Heating roller thermistor 2 error 2: Failed to reach warmup temperature After the main switch is turned ON or Thermistor is bent, installed the cover is closed, the heating roller incorrectly temperature does not reach the ready Defective heating roller thermistor temperature within 2 sec.
Page 431 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC553 Pressure roller thermistor error 3: Software - High temperature The thermistor detected a TRIAC short temperature over 220 C. IOB defective BICU defective Fusing temperature control is erratic Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code. SC554 Pressure roller thermistor error 4: Hardware - High temperature The thermistor detected a...
Page 432 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC563 Hot roller thermistor error 3: Software - High Temperature The thermistor detected a TRIAC short temperature over 250 C 10 IOB defective times within 1 sec. BICU defective Fusing temperature control is erratic Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code. SC564 Hot roller thermistor error 4: Hardware - High Temperature The thermistor detected a...
Page 433: Sc Codes Group 6: Device Communication
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC codes Group 6: Device Communication SC620 ARDF communication error A BREAK signal occurs after the ARDF disconnected machine detects the ARDF, or a IPU board harness disconnected, communication timeout occurs. defective IPU board defective Spurious noise from the power supply line ARDF control board defective...
Page 434 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC630 RSS communication error (Not use) An error was detected in No action required communication via RSS between the machine and the RSS center. Error occurred on a public line at the RSS terminal. SC632 Key/card counter device error 1 (Not use) After 1 data frame is sent to the The serial line from the device to the...
Page 435 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC680 BICU-MUSIC communication error The main CPU fails to UART communication failure; replace the communicate with the MUSIC BICU CPU within 5 sec. and three attempts failed. SC687 Memory address command error The BICU does not receive a BICU-Controller connection loose, memory address command from defective...
Page 436: Sc Codes Group 7: Peripherals
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC codes Group 7: Peripherals SC701 Original pick-up operation error Even though the pick-up motor is rotating Pick-up roller HP sensor clock-wise, the pick-up roller home position harness loose, disconnected, sensor cannot detect the position of the pick- defective up roller.
Page 437 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC723 Finisher feed-out motor The stack feed-out belt HP Stack feed-out HP sensor disconnected, sensor does not activate within defective the specified time after the stack Feed-out motor disconnected, defective feed-out belt motor turns ON. Finisher main board connection to feed The 1st detection failure issues out motor disconnected, defective...
Page 438 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC728 Shift jogger retraction motor error The side fences do not retract within the Motor harness disconnected, prescribed time after the retraction motor loose, defective switches ON. The 1st detection failure issues Motor defective a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this Motor overload SC code.
Page 439 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC743 Booklet stapler motor error 1 The front stapler unit saddle- Front motor disconnected, defective stitch motor does not start Front motor overloaded due to operation within the specified obstruction time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
Page 440 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC753 Return roller motor error Occurs during the operation of the lower tray Motor harness disconnected, pressure motor. loose, defective Motor overloaded Home position sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective Home position defective SC760 Finisher punch motor error The punch HP sensor is not Punch HP sensor disconnected, activated within the specified...
Page 441 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC765 Folding unit bottom fence lift motor The 1st detection failure issues a jam Motor harness disconnected, error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC loose, defective code. Motor defective SC766 Clamp roller retraction motor error The 1st detection failure issues a jam Motor harness disconnected, error, and the 2nd failure issues this...
Page 442 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC781 Z-Fold lower stopper motor Japan Only The lower stopper motor does Lower stopper motor disconnected, not attain the prescribed speed defective within the specified time. Lower stopper motor overloaded due to obstruction Lower stopper HP sensor disconnected, defective SC782 Z-Fold upper stopper motor Japan Only...
Page 443: Sc800: Overall System
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC800: Overall System SC817 Boot loader error The boot loader cannot read one of the File or module on the system following: self-diagnostic module, kernel, or one SD card is corrupted of the files of the root file system, or the check File or module on the system of one of these items on the system SD card SD card is illegal...
Page 444 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC821 Self-diagnostic error 2: ASIC The ASIC provides the central point for the control of bus arbitration for CPU access, for option bus and SDRAM access, for SDRAM refresh, and for management of the internal bus gate. 0B00 Error code 0xffff ffff is ASIC (controller board defective)
Page 445 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC824 Self-diagnostic error 4: NVRAM NVRAM device does not exist, NVRAM defective NVRAM device is damaged, NVRAM Controller board defective socket damaged NVRAM backup battery exhausted NVRAM socket damaged SC826 Self-diagnostic error 6: NVRAM (option NVRAM) 1501 The difference between the 1 NVRAM defective...
Page 446 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC850 Net I/F error Duplicate IP addresses. IP address setting incorrect Illegal IP address. Ethernet board defective Driver unstable and cannot be Controller board defective used on the network. SC851 IEEE 1394 I/F error (Not use) Driver setting incorrect and cannot NIB (PHY), LINK module defective;...
Page 447 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC861 HDD re-try failure At power ON with the HDD Harness between HDD and board detected, power supply to the HDD disconnected, defective is interrupted, after the HDD is HDD power connector disconnected awakened from the sleep mode, the HDD defective HDD is not ready within 30 s.
Page 448 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC868 SD card error 3: SD card access An error occurred while an SD card SD card not inserted correctly was used. SD card defective Controller board defective Note: If you want to try to reformat the SD card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1.
Page 449: Sc900: Miscellaneous
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SC900: Miscellaneous SC900 Electrical total counter error The total counter contains NVRAM incorrect type something that is not a number. NVRAM defective NVRAM data scrambled Unexpected error from external source SC910 External controller (E-7000) error 1 SC911 External controller (E-7000) error 2 SC912...
Page 450 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC925 Net File function error The NetFile file management on the Refer to the four procedures below HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile (Recovery from SC 925). management file is corrupted and operation cannot continue. The HDDs are defective and they cannot be debugged or partitioned, so the Scan Router functions...
Page 451 April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS Recovery from SC 925 Procedure 1 If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865) with SC 925, do the recovery procedures for SC860 ~ SC865. Procedure 2 If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865), turn the machine power OFF and ON.
Page 452 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS April 2007 SC990 Software error 2 The software performs an Software defective, re-boot unexpected function and the program cannot continue. SC991 Software error 3 The software performs an Software defective, re-boot unexpected function and the program cannot continue. However, unlike SC990, recovery processing allows the program to continue.
Page 453: Additional Sc Codes Printed In Smc Reports
April, 2007 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4.3.4 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORTS These codes are also used in the SMC report. Codes that have the same number in this series are identified by an additional 4- digit hexadecimal number. SC No.
Page 454: Additional Informations
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 4.4.1 TRAY PAPER SIZE SETTING SYMPTOM: The size of the paper in the tray does not match the paper size that is displayed on the LCD. Sometimes, this causes a jam to occur. CAUSE: The operator did not set the side fence or end fence correctly.
Page 455: Symptom:
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 4.4.2 PAPER MISFEED (J098/J099) SYMPTOM: “Paper Misfeed (J098)" or "Paper Misfeed (J099)" is displayed on the operation panel. CAUSE: J098: The Paper Type Detect setting is ON, and The paper type or thickness setting does not match that of the first sheet J099: The Double Feed Detect setting is ON, and The paper type or thickness setting does not match that of the second or...
Page 456: Action:
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 ACTION: Advise end users to do the following. 1. If J098 or J099 occur, press the "Next" button [A] on the operation panel. Then, follow the instructions that are displayed. 2. Do one of the following: Make sure the type and thickness of the paper match the type and thickness settings in the machine.
Page 457: How To Change The "Paper Thickness" And "Paper Type" Settings:
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS How to Change the “Paper Thickness” and “Paper Type” Settings: 1. Access: User Tools System Settings Tray Paper Settings (screen 2/4). 2. Press [B] to change the paper type and press [C] to change the paper thickness. How to Change the "Paper Type Detect"...
Page 458: Paper Feed Skew
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4.3 PAPER FEED SKEW SYMPTOM: Paper feed skew sometimes occurs (Printer and Copier). CAUSE: The registration roller bushing on rear side is damaged by some reason. One of the reasons of damaging the bushing is that the tip of the rear registration pressure spring is facing the wrong way.
Page 459 April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 2. Pull out the lower drawer unit [C]. 3. Remove the 3 clamps [D]. 4. Remove 2 clamps [E] and disconnect the connector [F]. 4-81...
Page 460 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 5. Remove the bracket [G] (1 screw). 6. Remove the harness cover [H] (1 screw). 4-82...
Page 461 April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 7. Check the position of rear registration pressure spring [I]. If the spring is in the NG position, change the spring to the OK position. NG position The area where the spring loops meet [J] is facing up OK position The area where the...
Page 462: White Line In Sub-Scan Direction On Single Color Solid Image
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4.4 WHITE LINE IN SUB-SCAN DIRECTION ON SINGLE COLOR SOLID IMAGE. SYMPTOM: A white line [A] appears along the paper feed direction in solid image areas that use one toner color (C, M, Y or K). Paper Feed Direction CAUSE: Dust or other foreign particles get into the development unit, and then get stuck...
Page 463: Cause:
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 4.4.5 DIRTY BLACK LINE IN CUB-SCAN DIRECTION OR DIRTY BACKGROUND SYMPTOM: 1. A dirty black line [A] shows in the sub-scan direction in single color (C, M, Y or Paper Feed Direction <<Example of Cyan halftone image>> 2.
Page 464 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 2. Remove the charge roller unit [A] (2 screws). This unit contains the charge roller and the charge roller cleaning roller. 3. Remove the drum charge roller with gear and bushing. 4. Remove the drum charge roller gear [B] and the bushing [C] at the same time (See below figure).
Page 465 April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 5. Clean the drum charge roller. 1) Wipe the drum charge roller with a clean dry cloth. 2) Then, wipe the drum charge roller with a wet cloth. NOTE: Use "water" to make the cloth wet. Do not use alcohol or any solvent. 3) Then, wipe the drum charge roller with a clean dry cloth again.
Page 466 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 7. Reinstall the drum charge roller onto the charge roller unit (1-bushing, 1-gear). NOTE: Make sure bushing is inserted correctly inside the molding guide [F]. Also make sure the charging terminal [G] touches the charge roller end correctly.
Page 467: Appendix:
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS APPENDIX: How to print out the Black, Magenta, Cyan, or Yellow halftone test pattern to confirm the symptom. 1. Enter SP 2109 2 (Test Pattern: Select Pattern). 2. Select "8: 2-Dot Independent" pattern, then press the "OK" button. 3.
Page 468: Expanded Soft Toner Cartridge
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4.6 EXPANDED SOFT TONER CARTRIDGE SYMPTOM: The Soft Toner Cartridge (STC) expands and cannot be installed in the copier bins. CAUSE: When the STC is brought to an elevation of 1000m (3,280ft.) or higher, the difference in air pressure makes the STC expand. ACTION: 1.
Page 469: Overview:
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 4.4.7 SYSTEM STOP CONTROL DUE TO THE TEMPERATURE LIMITATION OVERVIEW: 1. The “System Stop Control” feature stops the machine during a copy or print job, and “Self-checking…” is displayed on the LCD. Conditions: Engine firmware v1.15.0 (B1325402L) or newer The temperature/humidity sensor output is 41 C (105.8F) or higher.
Page 470: Symptom:
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4.8 LOW POWER MODE TEMPERATURE SYMPTOM: Fusing hot roller yield may decrease, or, the fusing hot roller could get damaged in the worst case. CAUSE: Hot roller has been exposed to excessive heat by the fusing lamp inside the Hot Roller.
Page 471 April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS Machine Status Transition time setting in UP: Hot Roller SP number for Hot Heater Roller Temperature User Tools System Settings ON/OFF Timer Settings Warming Up 9 min (Fixed) SP 1105 2 Operation Stand-by Mode MM: SP 1105 36 LL: SP 1105 37 HH: SP 1105 38 Panel-off Mode...
Page 472: Solution:
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4.9 POOR FUSING ON 100g/m PAPER SYMPTOM: Part of the image peels off the paper. Note: This symptom is most noticeable under these conditions: When solid images are printed onto 100 g/m (28lb. bond) paper in full color mode When using a PostScript3 unit type3260 (B761) or using EFI printer controller (G815: E-7000)
Page 473: Final Solution: Middle Thickness Paper Mode
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS Final Solution: Middle Thickness Paper Mode 1. Power Supply Voltage Check when using before applying the final solution. Check the Power Supply Voltage during the continuous printing. If the power supply voltage is lower than 220V, change the heating roller lamp2 duty for FC printing.
Page 474 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 3. Activate "Middle Thickness Paper Mode" To activate the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode", change the following SP settings as a set. 1) SP1107-006 (Mode Shift / Feed Norm Temp): Change to 1 (default: 0) NOTE: This is to turn ON the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode". 2) SP2307-006 (Set Ptype Link Special Paper): Change to "0: Normal Paper", then press "OK"...
Page 475 April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 6. Change the Fusing Temperature settings according to the type of "Middle Thickness Paper Mode", which is most appropriate for the poor fusing symptom. 1) "Middle Thickness Paper Mode -1" (Default) NOTE: This setting is effective both for poor fusing and the sponge image / stripper streaks.
Page 476 NOTE1: 1st Print Time in Final solution: 7sec to 14.5 sec (maximum) NOTE2: During this adjustment, the printing speed will reduce during the first 3-5 A3/DLT sheets. 1st 5 pages: 43.75cpm, after that 45cpm (in e-STUDIO4500c) 1st 5 pages: 51.25cpm, after that 55cpm (in e-STUDIO5500c)
Page 477: Appendix:
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS APPENDIX: Default settings of SP modes related to previous Temporary Solutions A, B and B+ Default Description NOTE Number Settings 1105-003 Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr 177 deg Heating Roller Temperature in Standby mode. Wait Temp: Norm 1105-006 Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr 175 deg...
Page 478: Abnormal Shift Tray Movement Of Sr842 (B706) With Efi Printer Controller (E-7000)
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4.10 ABNORMAL SHIFT TRAY MOVEMENT OF SR842 (B706) WITH EFI PRINTER CONTROLLER (E-7000) SYMPTOM: The shift tray for the 3000-sheet finisher SR842 (B706) finisher does not move correctly when all of the following conditions are met: The EFI printer controller E-7000 (G815) is used, and “Collate”...
Page 479: Symptom:
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 4.4.11 POOR FUSING ON 100g/m PAPER SYMPTOM: Streaks are visible on the glossy image printed with full coverage. Visible level of streaks differs according to the lighting angle. The streaks can be classified following 3 types. 1.
Page 480: Cause And Solution:
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 CAUSE and SOLUTION: Use the table below to check if the reported symptom is Type A, Type B or Type C. The causes and solutions are different for Type A, Type B and Type C. After reading this table, if you do not know which type the reported symptom is, contact your sales company for support.
Page 481: Fusing Anti-Glossy Streak Kit (P/N B1329713):
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS Fusing Anti-glossy Streak Kit (P/N B1329713): Detailed part information: The kit consists of the following parts (see illustration “Parts Locations” on next page): Gear Hot Roller: 44Z Gear Upper 52Z Gear 49Z Pressure Roller D50 Important Notes: 1.
Page 482 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 Parts Location ([A] and [B]) Parts Location ([C] and [D]) 24 11 4-104 06/10...
Page 483: Copier Firmware Update Notice When Color Controller E-7000 Is Installed
Color Controller E-7000 (see Procedure below). REASON: If the power switch on the Color Controller E-7000 is on, the firmware update will not start. This is because the e-STUDIO4500c/5500c cannot perform the update while it receives the boot-up status information from the E-7000. PROCEDURE:...
Page 484 4. Turn off the main power switch of the Color Controller E-7000. Main Power Switch 5. Put the firmware SD card into Slot 3 and turn on the e-STUDIO4500c/5500c main power switch. 6. After the firmware update is finished, turn off the e-STUDIO4500c/5500c main power switch and remove the SD card.
Page 485: Symptom:
April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 4.4.13 POOR FUSING ON 100g/m PAPER SYMPTOM: Part of the image peels off the paper. NOTE: This symptom is most noticeable under these conditions: When solid images are printed onto 100g/m (28lb.) paper in full color mode When using a Ricoh PostScript3 printer driver or using Fiery controller CAUSE: Not enough heat is supplied to the surface of the fusing roller.
Page 486 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 2. Toner Maximum Limitation If the customer agrees to the toner maximum limitation change, reduce the value as follows: For machines that use a Ricoh PS driver: Set SP1106-001 to a value of 200. Printer SP Default Description Final Solution...
Page 487 April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 3. Activate "Middle Thickness Paper Mode" To activate the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode", change the following SP settings as a set. 1) SP1107-006 (Mode Shift / Feed Norm Temp): Change to 1 (default: 0) NOTE: This is to turn ON the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode". 2) SP2307-006 (Set Ptype Link Special Paper): Change to "0: Normal Paper", then press "OK"...
Page 488 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 5. Select the Paper Thickness Setting to "Normal Paper" for the tray, on which you need to apply "Middle Thickness Paper Mode." User Tools System Settings Tray Paper Settings Paper Thickness Setting Then, select "Normal (72-126g/m )”...
Page 489 April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 3) "Middle Thickness Paper Mode -3" NOTE: This setting should be selected if the effectiveness of "Middle Thickness Paper Mode-2" is still not enough for the poor fusing. However, with this setting, it is easier for separation pawl streaks to occur.
Page 490: Nip Width Adjustment
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4.4.14 NIP WIDTH ADJUSTMENT This chapter shows you how to measure and adjust the nip width. Important: If a finisher is installed on the machine, remove it before you begin these procedures. MEASURING THE NIP WIDTH: 1.
Page 491 April, 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 5. Measure the nip width on the OHP sheet and make sure it is within specification. NOTE: Note: See Nip Width Specifications below. OHP sheet Center of OHP sheet Feed Direction NIP WIDTH SPECIFICATIONS: All of the following must be true. 1.
Page 492: Adjusting The Nip Width:
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 ADJUSTING THE NIP WIDTH: 1. Remove the fusing unit from the copier and place it on the table. 2. Make sure the pressure levers ([I], [J]) are in the upper position as shown in Photo A. NOTE: If the levers are not in the upper position, pressure will not be applied between the fusing belt and pressure roller.
Page 493: Service Program Mode Operation
April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5. SERVICE TABLES 5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes, and adjust values. CAUTION Never turn OFF the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
Page 494: To Enter And Exit The Service Mode
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE April, 2007 To Enter and Exit the Service Mode 1. Press the [Clear Modes] ( )key. 2. On the operation panel keypad, press "107". 3. Hold down the Clear/Stop ( ) key for more than 3 seconds. The Copy SP or PM Counter items are displayed.
Page 495 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Button Selection Entry 1. Refer to the SP Mode Tables in this section to find the SP that you want to adjust. 2. Press the Group number on the left side of the SP Mode window that contains the SP that you want to adjust.
Page 496: Sp Mode Button Summary
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE April, 2007 SP Mode Button Summary Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons. 14APR 2002 03:25 Exit SP Mode (Service) Open All Close All Copy Window SP Direct X-XXX-XXX COPY: SP1-001-001 SP1XXX Group SP2XXX Page SP3XXX Line SP4XXX...
Page 497 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SP Mode Print (SMC report print) You can print an SMC Report to check the machine’s condition. The SMC Report is a list of the SP commands and their settings. 5990 SP Mode Print (SMC Report Print) In the SP mode, press ‘Copy Window’...
Page 498: Memory All Clear: Sp5801
RESETS April, 2007 5.2 RESETS 5.2.1 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5801 Before shipping, the SP mode data settings are printed in an SMC Report and attached to the exposure glass of the machine for your reference. Store this report in a safe place (next to the toner collection bottle, for example). It is a list of all the SP initial settings.
Page 499 April, 2007 RESETS What It Initializes Comments All Clear Initializes items 2 to 15 below. Engine Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings. Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM update information.
Page 500: Software And Setting Reset
RESETS April, 2007 5.2.2 SOFTWARE AND SETTING RESET Software Reset The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. To do a software reset: Turn the main power switch OFF and ON. -or- Press and hold down [ /] and [#] together for at least 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once, release both buttons.
Page 501: Test Pattern Printing
April, 2007 TEST PATTERN PRINTING 5.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING 5.3.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2109 002 Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for design testing. These test patterns do not use the IPU. NOTE: Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely.
Page 502: Ipu Test Patterns: Sp4417
TEST PATTERN PRINTING April, 2007 5.3.2 IPU TEST PATTERNS: SP4417 The IPU test patterns are primarily used for design purposes. However, they can be used as follows: To confirm that the IPU is processing images correctly. To fine tune image processing To trace the causes of poor images.
Page 503: Firmware Update
April, 2007 FIRMWARE UPDATE 5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE 5.4.1 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE SD cards are used to update the software and to back up important data. Here is a list of the firmware modules that can be updated or restored from an SD card: GW controller software BICU software LCDC (operation panel) software...
Page 504: Firmware Update Procedure
FIRMWARE UPDATE April, 2007 B132S801.WMF Firmware Update Procedure 1. Disconnect these items if they are installed: Network cable Interface cable NOTE: This prevents outside interference from data transfers to the machine while the software is being uploaded. 2. Obtain the System SD card (P/N B1325730). 3.
Page 505 April, 2007 FIRMWARE UPDATE PCcard -> ROM Page01 Engine System Exit (0) B132S901.WMF Using the Screen: To select the item for upgrade, press the selection on the touch panel, or press the corresponding key on the 10-key pad (1 to 5) of the operation panel.
Page 506 FIRMWARE UPDATE April, 2007 PCcard -> ROM B132S903.WMF 8. Check the notations to the right. "ROM" tells you the module number and version of the currently installed software. "NEW" tells you the module number and version of software on the SD card in Slot 3.
Page 507: Verifying The Firmware Update
April, 2007 FIRMWARE UPDATE NOTE: During operation panel update the screen is blank and the progress bar is not displayed. To monitor the progress of the operation panel update watch the [Start] key. While opeation panel update is in progress, the [Start] key LED flashes RED.
Page 508: Error Message Table
FIRMWARE UPDATE April, 2007 Errors During Firmware Update If an error occurs during a download, an error message will be shown in the first line. The error code consists of the letter “E” and a number (“E20”, for example). Error Message Table MEANING SOLUTION Cannot map logical address...
Page 509: Downloading Stamp Data
April, 2007 FIRMWARE UPDATE 5.4.2 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA You must download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the hard disk after the HDD has been formatted or has been replaced and formatted. Then these stamps can be used by the system. If this is not done, the user will not have access to the fixed stamps (“Confidential”, “Secret”, etc.).
Page 510: Uploading And Downloading Nvram Data
FIRMWARE UPDATE April, 2007 5.4.3 UPLOADING AND DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA Uploading NVRAM Data to an SD card Always upload the NVRAM data to an SD card before you repolace the NVRAM. 1. Before you turn the machine OFF, do SP5990 001 (SMC Report Print). This gives you a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails and tells you the serial number of the machine.
Page 511: Downloading An Sd Card To Nvram
April, 2007 FIRMWARE UPDATE Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM Do this procedure to take the data uploaded from the NVRAM and download it to the new NVRAM. If the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the connection between the controller and BICU is defective, the NVRAM data download will not complete correctly.
Page 512: Service Program Tables
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 5.5 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5.5.1 SERVICE TABLE KEY Notation What it means [range/step] Example: [–9 to +9/0.1 mm] The default setting can be adjusted in 0.1mm steps in the range 9. Note: The default setting for each SP mode is shown on the screen in the “Initial”...
Page 513 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Abbreviations for e-STUDIO4500c/5500c SP Service Tables The SP titles are abbreviated so they can be used in smaller the 2-line displays of future printer models. Refer to this list if you do not understand the meaning of an abbreviation.
Page 514: Copier Service Tables
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 5.5.2 COPIER SERVICE TABLES Group 1000 1001 Lead Edge Reg Leading Edge Regisration Adjustment Adjusts the printing leading edge registration using the trimming area pattern (SP2109, Pattern No. 10). [–9~+9/0.1mm] Specification: 3 2mm 1002 Side-to-Side Reg Side-to-Side Registration Adjustment Adjusts printing side-to-side registration for each feed station, using the test pattern (SP2109, Pattern No.
Page 515 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 1009 Fine Adj Reg Spd Fine Adjust Registration Line Speed The SP allows fine adjustment fine adjustment of the registration roller speed to adjust the line speed. Reg. Roller Registration Roller: Fine Adjust Speed Allows fine adjustment of the registration roller line speed.
Page 516 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 1105 Htg Roll Sn1:Ctr Heating Roller: Sensor 1 (Center) Heating Roller Heating Roller SP codes 001 to 027 control the temperature of the heating roller. 001 Prefeed Temp Free-rotation start time. [60~200/1 deg.] 002 Reload Temp At normal standby temperature.
Page 517 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 022 Thk2:1C:HS During half-speed copying (paper setting). [130~200/1 deg.] 023 Thk2:FC:HS During half-speed copying (paper setting). [130~200/1 deg.] 024 Cont OHP:1C During half-speed copying (paper setting). [130~200/1 deg.] 025 Cont OHO:FC During half-speed copying (paper setting). [130~200/1 deg.] 026 OHP:1C:100mm/s During 100 mm/s copying (paper setting).
Page 518 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 1106 Fusing Temp Disp Fusing Lamp Control Method/Temperature Display These SP codes control the temperature control of the hot roller and display the temperatures of the hot roller, pressure roller, heating roller, and heating roller lamps.
Page 519 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 011 Fuse Exit Temp The temperature used to calculate the temperature specified for the hot roller at the end of fusing/exit motor rotation when the warmup temperature has been reached. [0~30/1 deg. ] 012 Add Rot Time The amount of time added to the rotation time of the fusing/exit motor after warmup temperture has been reached, based on the temperature specified for the hot...
Page 520 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 1108 Htg Roll Lamp 1 Heating Roller: Fusing Lamps Controls the level of the power (percentage) supplied to the heating rollers (Watts) when the machine is in the specified mode. At Reload During warmup after the machine is switched or returns from and energy save mode.
Page 521 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 1110 Paper Type Selet Paper Type Select These SP settings switch the ON/OFF the paper type type detection and double- feed functions. [0~1/1] 0: Enable 1: Disable Two sensors, one mounted above and one below the paper at the registration rollers, detect the opacity of the first sheet and compares this reading for every subsequent sheet.
Page 522 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 1200 1st CMP Down This SP adjusts the temperature of the heating roller at the start of the CMP down modes for black-and-white copying in normal/high temperature environments. 1st CPM Down 1st CMP Down (Heating Roller Temperature) StrTemp:Low/Hi:1C Normal temperature, high temperature environment [–20~0/1 deg.]...
Page 523 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 1202 Set Fusing Temp Set Fusing Temperature (for shift to low power mode) This SP sets the time interval for the machine to remain idle to trigger lower power mode 1. Set Fusing Temp 001 EngSave Time 1 [0~60/1 min.] 002 EngSave Time 2 [0~90/5 min.]...
Page 524 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 1905 Bypass Thk Bypass Tray: Thick Paper This SP switches the thick paper mode ON and OFF for thick paper and index sheet feed from the bypass tray. 0:No 1:Yes Bypass Feed: Thick Paper Mode Switches the thick paper mode ON/OFF for feed from the bypass tray.
Page 525: Group 2000
April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Group 2000 2101 Reg Col Interval Color Interval Registration Adjustment Use these SPs to correct problems with color registration. Color registration problems can be detected by checking the results of 2901 002 Pattern 1. Before doing these adjustments, try to solve the problem by doing SP2111.
Page 526 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2105 LD Syn PM Adj LD Pulse Modulation Synchronization Adjustment: DFU No information is available at this time. 001 K0 [-117~127/] 002 M0 003 C0 004 Y0 005 K1 006 M1 007 C1 008 Y1 2106 Poly Mtr OFF Polygon Motor Off Setting...
Page 527 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2109 Test Pattern Write Test Pattern Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for design testing. These test patterns do not use the IPU. 001 Image Add Select "1"...
Page 528 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2110 Force Tnr Cycle Force Toner Supply Cycle 001 Forces 2-Point interval correction. 2111 Force Tnr Pos Force Toner Position Alignment Executes the MUSIC feature. MUSIC is the "Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction". Three MUSIC sensors mounted above the ITB read three MUSIC sensor patterns developed on the ITB.
Page 529 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2151 Prt Area Coeff Coefficient Setting: Print Area Only DFU These SPs adjust the magnification coefficient for each color in these areas: Mid Area 0-3 Small Area 1-3 Small Area 5-8 001 K MidArea0 [1~99/0.01] 021 C MidArea0 [1~99/0.01] 002 K MidArea3...
Page 530 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 007 PaperInt:2Pt Meas Sets MUSIC to execute with 2-point measurement of image page intervals. [0~1/1] 008 JobInt:2Pt Meas Sets MUSIC to execute with 2-point measurements immediately before image output. [0~1/1] 010 Interrupt Int Sets the page interval beween MUSIC executions during long jobs print jobs.
Page 531 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 030 CMY:LowMin. No information is available at this time. [0~50/0.1V] 031 CMY:MidMin. No information is available at this time. [0~50/0.1V] 032 Base MaxDiff No information is available at this time. [0~50/0.1V] 033 Patch Mini Gap No information is available at this time.
Page 532 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2180 Lens Temp Lens Temperature Monitor These SPs display the measured temperatures of the optical lenses for each color. 001 M-K Displays the measured temperature of the magenta and black lenses (in the laser optics). [0~999/0.1 deg] 002 Y-C Displays the measured temperature of the yellow and...
Page 533 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 027 Y Sub Skew 3 Amount of shift correction for yellow in the sub scan direction at sensor 3. 030 MUSIC Result Displays the result of MUSIC adjustment 2182 Skew Corr Total Skew Correction Total These SPs display the total skew correction for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
Page 534 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2204 AC Charge Corr AC Charge: Setting for Ambient Correction These SPs adjust the target ac current for each operating environment (LL, ML, etc.). The process control self-check adjusts the ac current to achieve the target voltage.
Page 535 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2212 Set Dev DC Development DC: Fixed Setting These SPs set the development dc bias for the standard speed mode and low speed mode for each color, but take effect only when SP3501 001 is set to "1" (Fixed).
Page 536 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2253 Manual Tnr Fill Manually Fill Development Unit Sub Hoppers Use SPs to increase manually the supply of toner to the sub hopper of the development unit to determine if toner supply is abnormal or to recover normal operation of a color toner supply when image density becomes light.
Page 537 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2262 TD Sn Chk TD (toner density) Sensor Check Execution This SP executes a check of all or one selected TD sensor. 001 All Colors Select and press "Execute". 002 K Display the results with SP2663 001 to 004 003 M 004 C 005 Y...
Page 538 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2302 Temp/Humid Disp Temperature/Humidity Display This SP displays the current temperature and humidity. These readings are output by the temperature humidity display located on the bottom of the machine below the waste toner bottle. 001 Temp Disp Room temperature ( [0~100/1 deg.] 002 Rel Humidity Disp...
Page 539 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2307 Set Ptype Link Paper Type Link Setting For the copy mode selected, these SPs 1) switch the image transfer bias for each color and 2) switch the paper transfer and separation bias 001 Norm [0~5/1] 0: Normal Paper 002 Recycled Paper...
Page 540 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2313 Margin FC Bias Margin FC Bias: Setting for K This SP sets the image transfer bias for each in areas of the image where nothing is printed in the full-color mode. 2314 Set ProCon Bias Process Control: Bias Setting for K This SP sets the image transfer bias for each color during the process control self- check.
Page 541 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2382 Ptype K:ML Paper Type K: ML This SP sets image transfer bias for ML (Medium Low) speed during black-and- white copying in areas where black is used to develop the image. 006 Full Spd:ITB [10~250/1%] 011 Half Spd:ITB [10~250/1%]...
Page 542 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2394 Ptype FC:MH Paper Type FC:MH This SP sets image transfer bias for MH (Medium High) speed during full-color copying in areas where each color is used to develop the image. 2395 Ptype FC:HH Paper Type FC:HH This SP sets image transfer bias for HH (Highest) speed during full-color copying in areas where each color is used to develop the image.
Page 543 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2411 Size Coeff:Norm Size Correction Coefficient for Plain Paper: Size 1 These settings apply to paper sizes wider than the paper size of SP2308 001 (Threshold 1) and are applied only to 1) areas where image is created, 2) plain paper at full speed only, 3) both black-and-white or full color mode 007 Side1:Size :PTR Applies to Side 1 of duplex page.
Page 544 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2421 LEdge Cor:Norm K Leading Edge Correction for Plain Paper: K This SP sets the coefficient used to 1) correct bias at the leading edge for black image transfer (ITB) 2) bias at image to paper transfer, and 3) correct the dc and ac voltages applied at paper separation.
Page 545 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2426 LEdgeCor:Norm FC Leading Edge Correction for Plain Paper: FC This SP sets the coefficient used to 1) correct bias at the leading edge for full-color image transfer (ITB) bias at image to paper transfer when using plain paper, and 3) correct the dc and ac voltages applied at paper separation.
Page 546 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2431 Norm:K:LL Plain Paper: K Low 2432 Norm:K:ML Plain Paper: K Medium Low 2433 Norm:K:MM Plain Paper: K Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
Page 547 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2441 Norm:FC:LL Plain Paper: FC Low 2442 Norm:FC:ML Plain Paper: FC Medium Low 2443 Norm:FC:MM Plain Paper: FC Medium Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
Page 548 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2506 Set Bias:Thk:FC Set Bias for Thick Paper: FC This SP sets the following items with printing full-color on thick paper: 1) the image transfer bias for the drum to ITB image transfer for each color, 2) the ITB image to paper transfer, 3) DC/AC paper separation voltages for both sides duplex sheets.
Page 549 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2515 Size Coeff:Thk Size Correction Coefficient: Thick Paper These settings 1) apply to paper widths up to SP2308 004 Threshold 4, 2) apply to image areas only, 3) apply to thick paper mode (1/2 speed: 128 to 256 g/m²). 007 Side1:Size5:PTR [100~600/1%] 012 Side2:Size5:PTR...
Page 550 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2526 LEdge Cor:Thk:FC Leading Edge Correction for Thick Paper: K This SP sets the coefficient used to 1) correct bias at the leading edge for full-color image transfer (ITB) bias at image to paper transfer when using thick paper (128~256 g/m ), and 3) correct the dc and ac voltages applied at paper separation.
Page 551 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2531 Thk:K:LL Thick Paper: K Low 2532 Thk:K:ML Thick Paper: K Medium Low 2533 Thk:K:MM Thick Paper: K Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304 001 SP2431 –...
Page 552 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2541 Thk:FC:LL Thick Paper: FC Low 2542 Thk:FC:ML Thick Paper: FC Medium Low 2543 Thk:FC:MM Thick Paper: FC Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
Page 553 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2606 OHP FC Bias Set Bias for Transparency: K This SP sets the following standard bias voltages applied for the image area on OHP in the full-color mode at 1) image transfer from drum to ITB for each color, 2) image transfer from ITB to paper, and 3) at paper separation from the ITB.
Page 554 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2623 TEdge Cor:OHP K – PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Transparency: K Sets the strength of the bias coefficient for the bias applied at the trailing edge when the image is transferred from ITB to paper. Applied when printing in black-and-white mode on OHP at half-speed (128~256 g/m 2624 TEdge SWT:OHP K –...
Page 555 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2631 OHP:K:LL Transparency: K Low 2632 OHP:K:ML Transparency: K Medium Low 2633 OHP:K:MM Transparency: K Medium 2634 OHP:K:MH Transparency: K Medium High 2635 OHP:K:HH Transparency: K High These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304 001.
Page 556 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2751 Sp1 K Bias Set Bias for Special Paper 1: K These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1) create bias for image transfer from drum to ITB, 2) create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges on the both sides of the paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC).
Page 557 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES These SPs (SP2761~SP2765) set the paper size correction coefficients for Special Paper 1 relative to the settings done with SP2308 (Set Psize Thresh). All of hese settings: Apply to printing on Special Paper 1 in the black-and-white mode Apply only to the image area The title of each SP tells you the side and size where the setting is applied at ITB- to-paper transfer, for example: "Side1:Size1:PTR"...
Page 558 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2773 TEdge Cor:Sp1 K Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 1: K Sets the bias applied at the trailing edge when the image is transferred from ITB to paper by setting the start timing for SP2774 002 at the trailing edge. Applied to the trailing edge for black-and-white mode on Special Paper 1 only.
Page 559 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2778 TEdge Cor:Sp1 FC – PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 1: FC Sets the strength of the bias coefficient for the bias applied at the trailing edge when the image is transferred from ITB to paper. Applied when printing in full-color mode on Special Paper 1.
Page 560 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2791 Sp1:FC:LL Special Paper 1: FC Low 2792 Sp1:FC:ML Special Paper 1: FC Medium Low 2973 Sp1:FC:MM Special Paper 1: FC Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
Page 561 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2806 Sp2 FC Bias Set Bias for Special Paper 2: FC These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1) create bias for image transfer from drum of each color (Y, M, C, K) to the ITB, 2) create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges on the both sides of the paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC).
Page 562 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2821 LEdge Cor:Sp2:K Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 2: K Sets the leading edge correction coefficient when bias is applied as far as allowed by the seting of SP2822 for drum to image transfer of the image during black and white copying on Special Paper 2.
Page 563 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2826 LEdge Cor:Sp2 FC Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 2: FC These SPs do the following settings when printing on Special Paper 2 in the full- color mode: 1) ITB: Sets strength/timing of the correction coefficient for the application of bias when the image is transferred from the drum to the ITB.
Page 564 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2831 Sp2:K:LL Special Paper 2: K Low 2832 Sp2:K:ML Special Paper 2: K Medium Low 2833 Sp2:K:MM Special Paper 2: K Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304 001.
Page 565 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2841 Sp2:FC:LL Special Paper 2: FC Low 2842 Sp2:FC:ML Special Paper 2: FC Medium Low 2843 Sp2:FC:MM Special Paper 2: FC Medium These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1) create bias for image transfer from drum to ITB, 2) create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges on the both sides of the paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC).
Page 566 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2856 Sp3 FC Bias Set Bias for Special Paper 3: K These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1) create bias for image transfer from drum of each color (Y, M, C, K) to the ITB, 2) create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges on the both sides of the paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC).
Page 567 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2871 LEdge Cor:Sp3:K Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 3: K Sets the leading edge correction coefficient when bias is applied as far as allowed by the seting of SP2872 for drum to image transfer of the image during black and white copying on Special Paper 3.
Page 568 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2876 LEdge Cor:Sp3 FC Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 3: FC These SPs do the following settings when printing on Special Paper 3 in the full- color mode: 1) ITB: Sets strength/timing of the correction coefficient for the application of bias when the image is transferred from the drum to the ITB.
Page 569 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2881 Sp3:K:LL Special Paper 3: K Low 2882 Sp3:K:ML Special Paper 3: K Medium Low 2883 Sp3:K:MM Special Paper 3: K Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
Page 570 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 2891 Sp3:FC:LL Special Paper 3: FC Low 2892 Sp3:FC:ML Special Paper 3: FC Medium Low 2893 Sp3:FC:MM Special Paper 3: FC Medium These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
Page 571 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 2903 Env Thresh:K_PCU Room Temperature Correction Threshold: PCU This SP sets the threshold value of LL and ML for the current room temperature. 001 Abs Humid:Thresh1 [0~10,000 / 0.01 g/m 002 Abs Humid:Thresh2 [0~10,000 / 0.01 g/m 003 Abs Humid:Thresh3 [0~10,000 / 0.01 g/m 004 Abs Humid:Thresh4...
Page 572: Group 3000
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 Group 3000 3001 TD Sn:Vt Display TD Sensor: Vt Display Displays the current value of Vt (output voltage of the TD sensor). This is the value that the machine uses to calculate the density of the toner in each development unit. The toner density is checked after every page prints.
Page 573 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 3003 Vtref:Disp/Set Set/Display Vtref This SP displays the TD sensor target voltage. This target voltage is inversely proportional to the density of the toner: If the target is high, toner density is lowered. If the target is low, toner density is raised. The machine uses readings of the ID sensor patterns between pages to determine the amount of toner coverage and compared with the threhold values for the upper and lower limit of coverate.
Page 574 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 3042 Set Vtref Cor Set Vtref Correction Vtref is frequently updated in the toner supply cycle to stabiize the concentration of toner in the developer. Vtref is corrected between every printed page in the paper path using the correction amounts listed below for each color.
Page 575 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 3111 ID Sn:Voffset Voffset Value Detected by ID Sensor DFU Displays the output voltage of the directly reflected light when the LED of the ID sensor is switched OFF. 001 Voffset_Reg:Col:F [0~500/0 V] 002 Voffset_Dif:Col:F 003 Voffset_Reg:K:R 3121 Adjusted Vsg Vsg Reading After Vsg Adjustment...
Page 576 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 3194 ID Coeff Display ID Sensor Sensitivity Coefficient Display Displays the most recent and averaged readings of the sensitivity correction coeffients (K2 and K5). 001 K2:Col:Last [0~10000/0] 002 K5:Col:Last 005 K2:Col:Ave 006 K5:Col:Ave 3251 Tnr Supply Time Toner Calibration Time: Display Displays for confirmation the length of time the toner supply clutch remained on to send toner to the sub hopper after a new toner cartridge was installed.
Page 577 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 3303 Tnr Supply Rate Toner Supply Rate: Display Displays for confirmation the toner supply rate of toner supply control using the PID method. The toner supply rate is calculated as: Toner Supply Rate = Toner Supply Time/Time Allowed for Toner Supply x 100 where: Time is measured in msec.
Page 578 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 3401 TE Detect Set Detect/No Setting DFU These SP codes modify the operation of the toner end sensor. Switches toner end OFF and ON. [0~1/1] 0:Detect, 1: No Detect 3411 TE Pgs Min:K Use this SP to set the number of pages to print after the toner near-end alert has been issued.
Page 579 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 3501 Select ProCon Select Process Control Method The settings of these SP codes modify the operation of the automatic process control self-check. Automatic process control is done at these times: When the machine is turned ON At the end of the job, if the number of pages since the previous process contro, exceeds the value of SP 3551 Before ACC adjustment...
Page 580 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 006 DevGamma(EnvCorrct) Switches correction of the development gamma adjustment with the readings of the temperature/humidity sensor OFF and ON. Press either the "OFF" or "ON" button to toggle the setting. 007 DevGamma(TimeCorrct) Switches the timing of the development gamma adjustment during process control OFF and ON.
Page 581 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 3531 ProCon Target Set Target Amount for Process Control This SP sets the value for the maximum coverage to be achieved by the process control self-check. Process control then analyzes the readings of the 10-grade pattern, calculates the potentials required for develoment gamma and Vk (starting voltage), and then determines the drum charge levels, development biases, and LD power levels necessary to achieve the target coverage.
Page 582 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 3562 Display Vk Display Vk (Development Start Voltage) Displays Vk, the development start voltage. This development start voltage is used to indicate whether the developer has deteriorated. However, this is only a rough measurement due to other factors: A low threshold setting for the target development gamma.
Page 583 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 3573 Target Poten:Vd Display Target Potential (VdDisplay) Vd (read by the potential sensor) is the potential of dark areas of a drum before full laser exposure. This SP displays the value of Vd used by processing control to determine the target potential (Vd).
Page 584 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 3577 Chrg AC Control Display Value for Control of Development AC Displays the ac bias that was referenced during processing control and used in the previous jobs. (Process control is set for Auto with SP3501 001.) 001 Std Spd:K [0~300/0 kV] 002 Std Spd:M...
Page 585 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 3801 Init TD Sensor Execute TD Sensor Initialization Do this SP after replacing the developer in one or more of the PCUs when servicing the machine. This SP: Checks for the presence of developer in the development unit. (This ensures that the film seal has been removed from the developer pack.) Initializes TD sensor.
Page 586 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 3811 DevSetup Execute Execute Developer Setup Do this SP during the installation procedure after the developer and toner cartridges have been installed in the machine, or after the drum and cleaning blade have been replaced. This SP: Confirms that all the seals have been removed from each developer cartridge and developer is present in each PCU.
Page 587 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 3820 Manual ProCon Execute Process Control Manually Use this SP to execute process control manually. 3820 001 does potential control only. 3820 002 does potential control and toner density adjustment. Note: You must do SP3820 to enable any values you change with SP3531 (Procon Target).
Page 588: Group 4000
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 Group 4000 4008 Sub Scan Mag Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed. [-10~+10/0.1%] 4010 Sub Scan Reg Sub Scan Registration Adjustment Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub- scan direction.
Page 589 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 4020 Dust Check Set for Dust Check on ADF Exposure Glass These SP codes adjust the dust check operation at the ADF scanning glass and the white scanning belt. Note: Dust that triggers a warning could be removed from the glass by the originals in the feed path.
Page 590 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 4400 Org Edge Mask Set the Mask for Original This SP sets the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning. 001 Book:Sub:LEdge [0~30/0.1 mm] 002 Book:Sub:TEdge 003 Book:Main:LEdge 004 Book:Main:Tedge 005 ADF:Sub:LEdge 007 ADF:Main:TEdge 008 ADF:Main:TEdge 4417 IPU Test Pattern...
Page 591 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 4501 ACC Target Den ACC Target Notch Density This SP sets the target density for the ACC adjustment for machines connected with the Copy Connector (B328). For more see "4.2.5 Color Adjustment for Connected Copiers". 001 Copy:K:Text [0~50/1] 002 Copy:C:Text...
Page 592 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 These SPs (SP4550~SP4562) allow adjustments for the MTF(Modulation Transfer Function) level, smoothing, brightness and contrast of the scanning applications used on the document server (scan-to-email, scan-to-folder). 4550 SApli:TxtPrt Scanner Application: Text (Print) 4551 SApli:TxtOCR1 Scanner Application: Text (OCR) 4552 SApli:TxtOCR2 Scanner Application: Text (OCR: Dropout Color)
Page 593 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 4609 White Plate:R Standard White Plate Adjustment: Red DFU 4610 White Plate:G Standard White Plate Adjustment: Green DFU 4611 White Plate:B Standard White Plate Adjustmetn: Blue DFU This SP codes display the reference voltages stored in NVRAM at the factory for Red, Green, and Blue before the machine was shipped.
Page 594 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 4646 Scan Auto Error Error Flag for Automatic Adjustment: Scanning DFU This SP sets the error flag to display as the SBU is updated automatically when the machine is switched ON. 001 Gain [0x00~0xFFFF] 002 K Level GAIN_ERR_BO GAIN_ERR_BE GAIN_ERR_BK_GO...
Page 595 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 4691 White Lvl Peak:G White Level Peak: Green Scan Data DFU When switched ON, these SP codes display E (EVEN) or O (ODD) for the white level peak GREEN or black-and-white data after white level detection (AGC) after the machine is switched ON.
Page 596 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES April, 2007 4800 DF Density Adj ADF Density Adjustment This SP adjusts the white shading parameter for scanning an image with the ADF. Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs from the DF and Platen mode are different.
Page 597 April, 2007 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 4932 MainScan Dot Adj Main Scan Dot Position Adjustment Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue filter on the CCD. 001 R:Left [0~9/1] 002 R:Right 003 B:Left 004 B:Right 4954 Read/Restore Std Chart Standard: Read/Restore Use this SP to calibrate the scanner gamma on each machine connected with the Copy Connector (B328).
Page 598: Group 5000
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 Group 5000 5024 mm/inch Display Selection Selects the unit of measurement. After selection, turn the main power switch off and on. [0~1/1] 0: mm 1: inch 5045 Accounting Counter Counter Method Selects the counting method. Note: You can change the setting only one time.
Page 599 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5113 Optional Counter Type (Not Used) Default Optional Counter Type Selects the type of counter: 0: None 1: Key card (RK3, 4) Japan only 2: Key card down 3: Pre-paid card 4: Coin Lock 5: MF key card 11: Exp Key Card (Add) 12: Exp Key Card (Deduct) External Optional Counter Type...
Page 600 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5127 APS Mode This SP can be used to switch APS (Auto Paper Select) off when a coin lock or pre-paid key card device is connected to the machine. [0~1/1] 0: On 1: Off 5128 Code Mode With Key/Card Option Japan Only 5131 Set Paper Size...
Page 601 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5162 App. Switch Method Controls if the application screen is changed with a hardware switch or a software switch. [0~1/1] 0: Soft Key Set 1: Hard Key Set 5169 CE Login If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with this SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
Page 602 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5307 Summer Time Lets you set the machine to adjust its date and time automatically with the change to Daylight Savings time in the spring and back to normal time in the fall. This SP lets you set these items: - Day and time to go forward automatically in April.
Page 603 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5501 PM Alarm Sets the count level for the PM alarm. [0~9999/1] 0: Alarm disabled The PM alarm goes off when the print count reaches this value multiplied by 1,000. 5504 Jam Alarm Japan Only 5505 Error Alarm 5507...
Page 604 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 Door Operation: Time Determines what happens when the front door remains Length open. [0~1/1] 0: Automatic Call 1: Audible Warning at Machine 5513 Parts Alarm Level Count Japan Only Normal Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to sound for the number of copies.
Page 605 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5801 Memory Clear Memory Clear Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing this SP, print an SMC Report. All Clear Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below. Engine Clear Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings.
Page 606 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5803 Input Chk Input Check (Mainframe) ( 5.6.1) 5804 Output Chk Output Check ( 5.6.2) 5810 Cancel Fusing SC Cancel Fusing SC Code When the machine issues one of the "Level A" SC codes shown below, this indicates a serious problem in the fusing unit.
Page 607 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5816 Remote Service (Not Used) I/F Setting Turns the remote diagnostics off and on. [0~2/1] 0: Remote diagnostics off. 1: Serial (CSS or NRS) remote diagnostics on. 2: Network remote diagnostics. CE Call Lets the service engineer start or end the remote machine check with CSS or NRS;...
Page 608 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5821 Remote Service Address (Japan Only) CSS PI Device Code Sets the PI device code. After you change this setting, you must turn the machine off and on. RCG IP Address Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote Communication Gate) destination for call processing at the remote service center.
Page 609 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES TELNET Operation Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is Settings disabled, the Telnet port is closed. [0~1/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable Web Operation Disables or enables the Web operation. [0~1/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable Rendezvous Operation This SP disables/enables Rendezvous operation.
Page 610 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5836 Capture Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized, displayed, or selected. [0~1/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable Panel Setting Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated from the initial system screen.
Page 611 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Format for Printer Color [0~3/1] 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR DFU Format for Printer B&W [0~3/1] 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR Format for Printer B&W [0~3/1] 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR Default for JPEG [5~95/1]...
Page 612 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5839 IEEE 1394 (Not Used) This SP is displayed only when an IEEE 1394 (firewire) card is installed. Host Name Enter the name of the device used on the network. Example: RNP0000000000 Cycle Master Enables or disables the cycle master function for the 1394 bus standard. [0~1/1] 0: Disable (Off) 1: Enable (On)
Page 613 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Login MAX Sets the maximum number of logins from the initiator (6-bits) [0~63/1] 0: Reserved 63: Reserved 5840 IEEE 802.11b (Not Used) Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
Page 614 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5844 Transfer Rate Sets the speed for USB data transmission. [Full Speed] [Auto Change] Vendor ID Sets the vendor ID: Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company [0x0000~0xFFFF/1] DFU Product ID Sets the product ID. [0x0000~0xFFFF/1] DFU Device Release No.
Page 615 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Delivery Svr. Capability Changes the functions that the registered I/O device can do. [0~255/1] Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists...
Page 616 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 LDAP Search Timeout Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server. [1~255/1] Initialize Local Address Book Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a machine managed with UCS.
Page 617 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5847 Net File Resolution Reduction 5847 1 through 5847 6 changes the default settings of image data sent externally by the Net File page reference function. [0~2/1] 5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by NetFile.
Page 618 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5849 Installation Date Displays or prints the installation date of the machine. Display The “Counter Clear Day” has been changed to “Installation Date” or “Inst. Date”. Switch to Print Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total counter.
Page 619 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key) Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to the SD Card. A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card.
Page 620 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5859 Debug Log Save Function Key 1 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that use common memory on the controller board. ( 5.10) Key 2 [-9999999~9999999/1] Key 3 Key 4 Key 5...
Page 621 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5871 HDD Function Disable Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the HDD. After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to enable the setting. [0~1/1] 0: OFF 1: ON...
Page 622 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5907 Plug & Play Maker/Model Name Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names should be registered again. After selecting, press the “Original Type”...
Page 623 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 5967 Copy Server: Set Function Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.[0~1/1] 0: ON 1: OFF...
Page 624: Group 6000
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 Group 6000 6006 ADF Reg Adj ADF Registration Adjustment 001 ADF Main Reg Adj Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front/back in ADF mode. [–3~+3/0.1 mm] 003 ADF Sub Reg Adj Adjusts the vertical registration for the front/back in ADF mode.
Page 625 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 6020 ADF Skew Adj ARDF Skew Adjustment at the Scanning Entrance Roller This SP switches on stopping the scanning entrance roller for all paper sizes. Normally, the scanning entrance roller stops briefly to correct skew of small paper sizes in the ADF paper path and for the 2nd side scanning of originals during duplexing.
Page 626 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 6102 Adj Punch Pos 2 Punch Position Adjustment Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed. [-20~+20/0.4 mm] + Value: Shifts punch unit toward back of the finisher. - Value: Shift punch unit toward front of the finisher. 001 2-Hole:DOM 002 3-Hole:NA 003 4-Hole:EU...
Page 627 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 6104 Punch Hole Reg 2 Punch Hole Control This SP determines whether the finisher entrance roller stops to correct skew when paper enters the finisher. 001 A3 SEF [0~2/1] 0: No adjustment. Quickly restores the default setting of you 002 B4 SEF forget what the other settings do.
Page 628 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 6107 Interposer Size Paper Size Priority: Cover Interposer Controls the paper size for the cover interposer tray. Select a paper size and press [Execute] 001 A3SEF/12x18 [0~1/1] 0: A3 SEF, 1: 12” x 18” 002 EU China [0~2/1] 0: 8½”...
Page 629 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 6111 Adj Z-Fold 2 Adjust Fold Position: Z-Fold Unit: Fold 2 Japan Only Adjusts the position of the second fold for the Z-folding unit. 6112 Book Staple Adj Adjust Booklet Stapling Position Japan Only This SP corrects the stapling postion of the booklet stapler when paper is stapled and folded.
Page 630 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 6115 Max Prestack Number of Pre-Stack Sheets This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray. With this SP set to the default (3): 3 sheets are sent to the pre-stack tray. When the 4th sheet feeds, the 4th sheet and 3 sheets from the pre-stack tray are sent to the stapling tray together Note: You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding thick or slick...
Page 631 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 6121 Input Chk:Fin1 Input Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701) ( 5.8.1) These are the input checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701. 6122 Input Chk:Fin2 Input Check: Finisher 2 (B706) ( 5.9.1) These are the input checks for the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. 6123 Output Chk:Fin1 Output Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701) ( 5.8.2)
Page 632 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 6126 Book Fold Adj Adjusts the booklet folding position These SPs adjust the position for booklet stapling with the 2000/3000-Sheet Finisher B700. The initial setting is at "0" and can be adjusted in increments of 0.2 mm A3 SEF:Sub Scan [-3 to +3/0.2 mm] B4 SEF:Sub Scan...
Page 633: Group 7000
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Group 7000 7001 Op Time Disp Main Motor Operation Time Displays the total drum rotation time. 7401 Total SC Counter Total SC Counter Displays the total number of SCs logged. 7403 SC History 001 Latest Displays the latest 10 SC codes.
Page 634 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations - Copier Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
Page 635 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations - 3000-Sheet Finisher (Japan Only) Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
Page 636 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations - Mail Box B762 Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
Page 637 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations – 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher B700 Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
Page 638 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Location – All Finishers Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
Page 639 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 7506 Jam Count by Paper Size Displays the total number of jams by paper size. A4 LEF Displays the total number of jams by paper size. A5 LEF B5 LEF LT LEF HLT LEF A4 SEF A5 SEF B4 SEF B5 SEF...
Page 640 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 7617 Parts PM Counter Display Normal Japan Only Japan Only 7618 PM Parts Counter Reset Japan Only Normal Press [Execute] to clear the parts replacement alarm counter for the main machine. Press [Execute] to clear the parts replacement alarm counter for the ADF.
Page 641 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 7835 ACC Counter No information is available at this time. 001 Copy ACC 002 Printer ACC 7836 Total Memory Size Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board. 7852 ADF Scan Glass ADF Scan Glass Displays the count for the number of times the machine has detected dust on the ARDF scanning glass at the beginning of copy jobs.
Page 642 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 7935 MotdrvtimeDisp Motor Drive Time Display These SPs display the total drive times for each of motor listed below. The 8-digit display shows the total in minutes. OPCMot:K Drum Motors OPCMot:M OPCMot:C OPCMot:Y DrvMot:K PCU motor (drives all components of PCU other than the drum) DrvMot:M DrvMot:C DrvMot:Y...
Page 643: Group 8000
August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES Group 8000 Current Status of the SP8xxx Counters Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
Page 644 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 Group 8 Service Table Keys Many of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an ‘application’). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
Page 645 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Page 646 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 ABBREVIATION WHAT IT MEANS Paper PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam PrtPGS Print Pages Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This machine is under development and currently not available. (Not Used) Resolution Service Code (Error SC code displayed) Scan Sim, Simplex...
Page 647 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES SP8-xxx: Data Log2 8 001 T:Total Jobs These SPs count the number of times each application is used to do a job. 8 002 C:Total Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] 8 004 P:Total Jobs Note: The L: counter is the total number of 8 005 S:Total Jobs times the other applications are used to send a...
Page 648 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 011 T:Jobs/LS These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the document server by each application, to 8 012 C:Jobs/LS reveal how local storage is being used for input. 8 014 P:Jobs/LS [0~9999999/ 1] 8 015 S:Jobs/LS The L: counter counts the number of jobs...
Page 649 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl These SPs reveal what applications were used to output documents from the document server. 8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl [0~9999999/ 1] 8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl The L: counter counts the number of jobs 8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl printed from within the document server mode 8 036...
Page 650 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 061 T:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the application. 8 062 C:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the application.
Page 651 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 071 T:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job, regardless of which application was used. 8 072 C:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job.
Page 652 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 131 T:S-to-Email Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not. 8 131 1 Count for the number of jobs with black-and-white. 8 131 2 Color Count for the number of jobs with color.
Page 653 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 141 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router server. 8 141 1 Count for the number of jobs with black-and-white. 8 141 2 Color Count for the number of jobs with color.
Page 654 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 191 T:Total Scan PGS These SPs count the pages scanned by each application that uses the scanner to 8 192 C:Total Scan PGS scan images. 8 195 S:Total Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 1] 8 196 L:Total Scan PGS SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical pages.
Page 655 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 201 T:LSize Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy jobs. Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.
Page 656 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 221 ADF Org Feeds [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back side scanning. 8 221 1 Front Number of front sides fed for scanning: With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning.
Page 657 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 241 T:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs, regardless of which application was used. 8 242 C:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.
Page 658 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt These SPs show how many times Image Edit features have been selected at the 8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt operation panel for each application. Some 8 254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt examples of these editing features are: 8 256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt Erase>...
Page 659 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp These SPs count the number of pages stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit. [0~9999999/ 1] The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen...
Page 660 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 311 T:Scan PGS/Rez [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings. 8 315 S:Scan PGS/Rez [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings.
Page 661 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 391 LSize PrtPGS [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger. Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Page 662 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 421 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications. 8 422 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the copier application.
Page 663 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 431 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below, regardless of which application was used. 8 432 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the copy application.
Page 664 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 441 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications. 8 442 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy application.
Page 665 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 451 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station. 8 451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray 8 451 2 Tray 1 Copier 8 451 3 Tray 2 Copier 8 451 4 Tray 3...
Page 666 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 471 PrtPGS/Mag [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed. 8 471 1 ~49% 8 471 2 50%~99% 8 471 3 100% 8 471 4 101%~200% 8 471 5 201% ~ Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of...
Page 667 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 491 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages output by the Copy, document server, and Fax applications. 8 492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by color mode the total output by the Copy application only 8 496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode...
Page 668 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 511 T:PrtPGS/Emul [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed. 8 514 P:PrtPGS/Emul [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed. 8 514 1 RPCS 8 514 2...
Page 669 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 521 T:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all applications. 8 522 C:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy application.
Page 670 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 581 T:Counter [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Page 671 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 586 L:Counter [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the total output broken down by color for output from within the document server mode window at the operation panel.These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Page 672 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 661 T:Deliv PGS/Svr [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by both Scan and LS applications. 8 661 1 8 661 2 Color Supported by Color MFP machines only.
Page 673 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 691 T:TX PGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages sent from the document server. The counter for 8 692 C:TX PGS/LS the application that was used to store the 8 694 P:TX PGS/LS pages is incremented.
Page 674 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 741 RX PGS/Port [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive them. 8 741 1 PSTN-1 8 741 2 PSTN-2 8 741 3 PSTN-3 8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4) 8 741 5 Network...
Page 675 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8831 Pixel Cover Ave. Average Pixel Coverage 001 Accum. Ave. K 002 Accum. Ave. M 003 Accum. Ave. C 004 Accum. Ave. Y 8841 Pixel Cover Last Average Pixel Coverage 001 Last Page K 002 Last Page M 003 Last Page C 004 Last Page Y 8 851...
Page 676 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 8 891 Pages: Current Toner [0~65 535] These SPs count the number of pages for the current set toner. 8 891 1 Black toner 8 891 2 Magenta toner 8 891 3 Cyan toner 8 891 4 Yellow toner 8 941 Machine Status...
Page 677 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 8 951 AddBook Register These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data registration. 8 951 1 User Code User code registrations. [0~9999999/ 1] 8 951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations. 8 951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
Page 678: Group 9000
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 Group 9000 9405 System Stop Ctrl Setting of the System Stop Control Function. Setting System Stop Control Switches the System Stop Control Function ON ON/OFF or OFF. When this switch is ON: The machine stops the job when the output of the temperature/humidity sensor on the K-PCU is 41 C (105.8F) or higher.
Page 679 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 9407 Environ Cntrl Environ Cntrl Enable/disables the Peltier unit. [0 to 1 / 1] 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Op Humidity Factory Use Only. Do Not Touch in the field. Stop Humidity Factory Use Only. Do Not Touch in the field. Op On Time Factory Use Only.
Page 680: Printer Service Table
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5.5.3 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE Group 1 (Printer) 1001 Bit Switch 001 Bit Switch 1 Settings Adjusts the bit switch settings. DFU 002 Bit Switch 2 Settings 003 Bit Switch 3 Settings 004 Bit Switch 4 Settings 005 Bit Switch 5 Settings 006 Bit Switch 6 Settings 007 Bit Switch 7 Settings...
Page 681 August, 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 1103 Test Page Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment. 001 Color Gray Scale 002 Color Pattern 1104 Gamma Adjustment Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the “Mode Selection” menu. 001 Black: Highlight [ 0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ] 002 Black: Shadow...
Page 682: Scanner Service Table
SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES August, 2006 5.5.4 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE Group 1 (Scanner) 1004 Compression Type Selects the compression type for binary picture processing. [ 1 to 3 /1/step ] 1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR 1005 Erase margin Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image. If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin.
Page 683: Copier Input/Output Check
August, 2006 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.6 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.6.1 COPIER INPUT CHECK: SP5803 This procedure allows you to test sensors and other components of the machine. After you select one of the categories below by number, you will see a small 8-bit table with the number of the bit and its current setting (0 or 1).
Page 684 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 003 Paper Feed 3 Input Bit 7 Paper Size – Tray 3 See following table. Bit 6 Paper Size – Tray 3 Bit 5 Paper Size – Tray 3 Bit 4 Paper Size – Tray 3 Bit 3 Paper Size –...
Page 685 August, 2006 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 005: Paper Feed 5 Input Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Right Tray Paper Sensor – Tray 1 No Paper Paper Bit 1 Number of Trays Detected 3-Trays 4-Trays Bit 0 006: Paper Feed 6 Input...
Page 686 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 009: Used Toner Trans Input Bit 7 Bit 6 WasteToner Lock Sensor Bit 5 Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor Bit 4 Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor Bit 3 Waste Toner Bottle Near Full Sensor Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 010: Paper Trans 1...
Page 687 August, 2006 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 013: Paper Trans 4 Input Bit 7 Paper Size Switch 1 following Bit 6 Paper Size Switch 2 table. Bit 5 Paper Size Switch 3 Bit 4 Paper Size Switch 4 Bit 3 Bypass Paper Size Switch Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0...
Page 688 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 015: PCU Motor Lock Input Bit 7 PCU Motor Lock – Y Bit 6 PCU Motor Lock – M Bit 5 PCU Motor Lock – C Bit 4 PCU Motor Lock – K Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0...
Page 689 August, 2006 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 019: Fan System 3 Input Bit 7 Controlling Box Cooling Fan Motor 2 Lock Bit 6 Controlling Box Cooling Fan Motor 1 Lock Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Off: No Lock On: Locked 020: Hi Volt SC1 (Drum Charge Power Pack)
Page 690 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 023: Paper Transfer Input Bit 7 ITB Lift Sensor Separated Contact Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 ITB Position Sensor 1 See folloeing table. Bit 0 ITB Position Sensor 2 Bit Table: 023 Bit 1/Bit 0 Function...
Page 691 August, 2006 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 026: Set Detection Input Bit 7 Key Card Set Bit 6 Key Count Set Bit 5 Mechanical Counter B Set Bit 4 Mechanical Counter FC Set Bit 3 Fusing Unit Set Bit 2 Duplex Unit Set Bit 1 Drawer Set Bit 0...
Page 692: Copier Output Check: Sp5804
COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 5.6.2 COPIER OUTPUT CHECK: SP5804 1. Open SP mode 5804. 2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check. (Refer to the table on the next page.) 3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. NOTE: You cannot exit and close this display until you press off to switch off the output check currently executing.
Page 693 August, 2006 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5804 Output Chk Output Check Feed Mtr 1:Rev/Nor Dup Inv M:Fwd/Hi Feed Mtr 1:Rev/Haf Dup Inv M:Fwd/Haf Feed Mtr 2:Fwd/Nor DupInvM:Fwd/TS Feed Mtr 2:Fwd/Hi DupTrans M:Fwd/Nor Feed Mtr 2:Fwd/Haf DupTrans M:Fwd/Hi Feed Mtr 2:Rev/Nor DupTrans M:Fwd/Haf Feed Mtr 2:Rev/Haf Dup JG SOL SOL11...
Page 694: Ardf Input/Output Check
ARDF INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 5.7 ARDF INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.7.1 ADF INPUT CHECK: SP6007 1. Open SP mode SP6007. 2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check. (Refer to the table below.) 3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.
Page 695: Adf Output Check: Sp6008
August, 2006 ARDF INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.7.2 ADF OUTPUT CHECK: SP6008 1. Open SP mode SP6008. 2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check. (Refer to the table below.) 3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.
Page 696: Finisher 1 (B700/B701) Input/Output Check
FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 5.8 FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.8.1 INPUT CHECK: FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) SP6121 6121 Input Chk:Fin1 Input Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701) These are the input checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701. 001 Entrance Sn 026 Punch Full Sn 002 Proof Exit Sn 027 Punch HP Sn...
Page 697: Output Check Finisher 1: (B700/B701) Sp6123
August, 2006 FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.8.2 OUTPUT CHECK FINISHER 1: (B700/B701) SP6123 6123 Output Chk:Fin1 Output Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701) These are the output checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701. 001 Entrance M 017 Pos Roll SOL 002 Up Trans M 018 Stp Edge Plate SOL 003 Low Trans M 019 Book Press SOL...
Page 698: Finisher 2 (B706) Input/Output Check
FINISHER 2 (B706) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK August, 2006 5.9 FINISHER 2 (B706) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.9.1 INPUT CHECK FINISHER 2: (B706) SP6122 6122 Input Chk:Fin2 Input Check: Finisher 2 (B706) These are the input checks for the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. 001 Entrance Sn 021 Proof Full Sn 002 Proof Exit Sn 022 Staple Rotate HP Sn...
Page 699: Output Check Finisher 2 (B706) Sp6125
August, 2006 FINISHER 2 (B706) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK 5.9.2 OUTPUT CHECK FINISHER 2 (B706) SP6125 6125 Output Chk:Fin2 Output Check: Finisher 2 (B706) These are the input checks for the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. 001 Off:Stop 014 Stp Lift M:1 Op 002 Main M:Cont 015 Stp Exit M:Cont 003 Shift Exit M:Cont 016 Open Exit M:Cont...
Page 700: Using The Debug Log
USING THE DEBUG LOG August, 2006 5.10 USING THE DEBUG LOG This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Service Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis. Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
Page 701 August, 2006 USING THE DEBUG LOG 4. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, press “2 Target”, enter “2” with the operation panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination, then press COPY : SP-5-857-002 Save Debug Log Target (2:HDD 3:SD Card)
Page 702 USING THE DEBUG LOG August, 2006 6. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information. Press “5859”. Under “5859” press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to record. Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key.
Page 703: Retrieving The Debug Log From The Hdd
August, 2006 USING THE DEBUG LOG Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting: Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer, Scanner, and Web memory modules. The initial settings are all zero.
Page 704: Recording Errors Manually
USING THE DEBUG LOG August, 2006 5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically, for any other errors that occur while the service engineer is not on site, please instruct customers to perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug data.
Page 705: New Debug Log Codes
August, 2006 USING THE DEBUG LOG 5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot.
Page 706: User Tools
USER TOOLS August, 2006 5.11 USER TOOLS 5.11.1 OVERVIEW This section is a summary of the user tools. Refer to the operator’s manual for more details. 1. On the operation panel, press the User Tools button. 2. Press the appropriate key, then access the following items: System Settings Maintenance Copier/Document Server Features...
Page 707: System Settings
August, 2006 USER TOOLS 5.11.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS Key press: [User Tools]> "System Settings" System Settings Map General Features Panel Tone Warm Up Notice Copy Count Display Function Priority Print Priority Function Reset Timer Interleave Print Output Copier Output: Document Server Output: Printer ADF Original Table Elevation Job List Display Time...
Page 708 USER TOOLS August, 2006 System Settings Map (Continued) Timer Settings Auto Off Timer Energy Saver Timer Panel Off Timer System Reset Timer Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer Printer Auto Reset Timer Scanner Auto Reset Timer Set Date Set Time Weekly Timer Code Auto Logout Timer Weekly Timer: Monday Weekly Timer: Tuesday...
Page 709: Maintenance
August, 2006 USER TOOLS System Settings Map (Continued) Administrator Tools User Authentication Management Administrator Authentication Management Program/Change Administrator Key Counter Management External Charge Unit Management Extended Security Extend Change Unit Management Enhanced Extend Change Unit Management Display Print Counter Display/Clear/Print Counter Per User Address Book Management Address Book: Program/Change/Delete/Delete Group Address Book: Edit Title...
Page 710: Copier/Document Server Features
USER TOOLS August, 2006 5.11.4 COPIER/DOCUMENT SERVER FEATURES Key press: [User Tools]> "Copier/Document Server Features" Copier/Document Server Features Map General Features Auto Paper Select Priority Paper Display Original Type Display Original Type Priority Original Photo Type Priority Auto Tray Switching Duplex Mode Priority Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode Original Orientation in Duplex Mode...
Page 711 August, 2006 USER TOOLS Copier/Document Server Features Map (Continued) Edit Front Margin: Left/Right Back Margin: Left/Right Front Margin: Top/Bottom Back Margin: Top/Bottom 1-Sided 2-Sided Auto Margin: T to T 1-Sided 2-Sided Auto Margin: T to B Erase Border Width Erase Original Shadow in Combine Erase Center Width Copy Back Cover Front Cover Copy in Combine...
Page 712 USER TOOLS August, 2006 Copier/Document Server Features Map (Continued) User Stamp Program/Delete Stamp Stamp Position: 1 Stamp Position: 2 Stamp Position: 3 Stamp Position: 4 Stamp Format: 1 Stamp Format: 2 Stamp Format: 3 Stamp Format: 4 Stamp Color: 1 Stamp Color: 2 Stamp Color: 3 Stamp Color: 4...
Page 713: Printer Features
August, 2006 USER TOOLS 5.11.5 PRINTER FEATURES Key press: [User Tools]> "Printer Features" Printer Features Map List/Test Print Multiple Lists Config. Page Error Log Menu List PCL Config./Font Page PS Config./Font Page PDF Config./Font Page Hex Dump Maintenance 4 Color Graphic Mode System Print Error Report Auto Continue...
Page 714 USER TOOLS August, 2006 Printer Features Map (Continued) PCL Menu Orientation Form Lines Font Source Font Number Point Size Font Pitch Symbol Set Courier Font Extend A4 Width Append CR to LF Resolution PS Menu Data Format Resolution Color Setting Color Profile 5-222...
Page 715: Scanner Features
August, 2006 USER TOOLS 5.11.6 SCANNER FEATURES Key press: [User Tools]> "Scanner Features" Scanner Features Map Scan Settings Default Scan Settings Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass Wait Time for Next Orignals: SADF Original Setting Switch to Batch Mixed Original Sizes Priority Change Initial Mode Background Density of ADS (Full Color) Destination List Settings...
Page 716: Inquiry
USER TOOLS August, 2006 5.11.7 INQUIRY Key press: [User Tools]> "Inquiry" Consumables Machine Maintenance/Repair Toner <Black> Telephone No. Toner <Yellow> Serial No. of Machine Toner <Magenata> Sales Representative Toner <Cyan> Telephone No. Print Inquiry List To print the Inquiry List, press "Print Inquiry List", read the displayed message then press [Start] on the operation panel.
Page 717: Details
August, 2006 GENERAL OVERVIEW 6. DETAILS 6.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW 6.1.1 MAIN MACHINE B132V102.WMF...
Page 718 GENERAL OVERVIEW August, 2006 1. Transport Belt (ARDF) 18. Feed Sensor (Paper Tray) 2. Entrance Roller (ARDF) 19. Feed Roller (Paper Tray) 3. Feed Belt (ARDF) 20. Separation Roller (Paper Tray) 4. Separation Roller (ARDF) 21. Pick-up Roller (Paper Tray) 5.
Page 719 August, 2006 GENERAL OVERVIEW 6.1.2 PAPER PATH: COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B132V104.WMF 1. Proof Tray 2. Cover Sheet Path 3. Original Path 4. Bypass Tray 5. LCT Feed 6. Vertical Transport Path 7. Duplex Transport Path 8. Finisher Lower Tray (Booklet) 9.
Page 720 GENERAL OVERVIEW August, 2006 6.1.3 PAPER PATH: 9-BIN MAILBOX B132V105.WMF 1. Original Paper Path 2. Bypass Feed 3. LCT Feed 4. Vertical Transport Path 5. Junction Gate (Paper goes up to the mailbox or out to the finisher’s proof tray) 6.
Page 721 August, 2006 GENERAL OVERVIEW 6.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT B132V106.WMF 1. Scanner Motor 12. Fusing Exit Motor 2. PCU Motor – K 13. Duplex Transport Motor 3. Drum Motor – K 14. Paper Feed Motor 3 4. PCU Motor – M 15. Paper Feed Motor 2 5.
Page 722: Boards
BOARDS August, 2006 6.2 BOARDS 6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM B132D981.WMF...
Page 723 August, 2006 BOARDS 6.2.2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS BICU (Base Engine and Image Control Unit) The BICU is the main control board and controls these functions: Engine sequence control (all sensors, motors, fusing temperature control circuits) Image processing control (on the IPU) Scanning control GW controller interface Peripheral timing control...
Page 724 BOARDS August, 2006 SBU (Sensor Board Unit) The SBU does the following: Takes the analog signals from the CCD and converts them to digital. Sends serial data to the BICU. Sends signals from the main CPU to the SIOB, to control the scanner components.
Page 725: Controller Box Ventilation
August, 2006 BOARDS 6.2.3 CONTROLLER BOX VENTILATION B132D968.WMF [A]: HDD cooling fan [B]: Controller box exhaust fan 1 [C]: Controller box exhaust fan 2 Three fans cool the PCBs in the controller box. The HDD cooling fan [A] pulls cool air into the bottom of the PCB box. The controller box exhaust fans [B] and [C] pull the hot air out of the top of the controller box.
Page 726: Copy Process Overview
COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW August, 2006 6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW B132D001.WMF This machine has four PCUs in a straight line: Y, M, C, K. The ITB lift motor raises and lowers the ITB unit. The ITB lift motor raises ITB for full-color copying. The drum of every PCU contacts the ITB below.
Page 727 August, 2006 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW B132D984.WMF Here is a general description of the copy process in the black PCU. These mechanisms are identical in each PCU (Y, C, M, K). 1. DRUM CHARGE In the dark, the charge roller gives a negative charge to the drum. The charge stays on the surface of the drum because the OPC layer has a high electrical resistance in the dark.
Page 728 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW August, 2006 4. DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR The drum potential sensor in each PCU detects the drum potential. Changes in conditions near the drum (heat, humidity, drum condition) change the drum potential. The machine uses the output from this sensor to adjust the voltages that are used during auto process control.
Page 729: Ardf
August, 2006 ARDF 6.4 ARDF 6.4.1 OVERVIEW 10 11 B132D119.WMF 1. Original Width Sensors (x 5) 15. Lower Inverter Sensor 2. Entrance Roller 16. Upper Junction Gate 3. Skew Correction Sensor 17. Exit Roller 4. Separation Sensor 18. Lower Inverter Roller 5.
Page 730 ARDF August, 2006 6.4.2 ARDF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Components View 1: Sensors B132D106.WMF 1. Original Width Sensors ( 8. Original Length Sensors (x3) 2. Original Width Sensor 1 (for B6 SEF) 9. Original Set Sensor 3. Interval Sensor 10. Upper Inverter Sensor 4.
Page 731 August, 2006 ARDF Components View 2: Motors, Sensors, Other B132D107.WMF 1. Pick-up Motor 7. ARDF Position Sensor 2. Pick-up Roller HP Sensor 8. APS Start Sensor 3. Exit Motor 9. Upper Inverter Motor 4. Feed Motor 10. ARDF Transport Motor 5.
Page 732 ARDF August, 2006 ARDF Components View 3: Drive Motors B132D108.WMF 1. Pick-up Motor 2. Exit Motor 3. Bottom Plate Lift Motor 4. Upper Inverter Motor 5. ARDF Transport Motor 6. Lower Inverter Motor 7. Feed Motor 6-16...
Page 733: Original Size Detection
August, 2006 ARDF 6.4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION B132D110.WMF The original size is detected by 5 width sensors and 3 length sensors. When the leading edge of the B5 A4 LGL paper passes the skew correction sensor, the CPU reads the outputs from the original width sensors.
Page 734 ARDF August, 2006 Original Size Detection Table Original Width Original Length Region Size (W x L) Sensors Sensors A3 SEF (297 x 420 mm) B4 SEF (257 x 364 mm) A4 SEF (210 x 297 mm) A4 LEF (297 x 210 mm) B5 SEF (182 x 257 mm) B5 LEF (257 x 182 mm) A5 SEF (148 x 210 mm)
Page 735 August, 2006 ARDF Changing the Default Selection with SP6016 and SP5126 Some original sizes are almost the same. The machine cannot detect a difference between these sizes. Because of this, you can force the machine to detect one size or the other size with SP6016. 1.
Page 736 ARDF August, 2006 6.4.4 PICK-UP ROLLER B132D109.WMF [A]: Pick-up roller lift motor [B]: Cam [C]: Pick-up roller release lever [D]: Pick-up roller [E]: Bottom plate position sensor When there are no originals, the pick-up roller [D] stays up at the home position. When an original is put on the tray: Original set sensor Pick-up motor [A]...
Page 737: Bottom Plate Lift
August, 2006 ARDF 6.4.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT B132D111.WMF [A]: Bottom plate lift motor [B]: Lift lever [C]: Bottom plate HP sensor When an original is placed on the original tray: Original set sensor pick-up roller drops Bottom plate position sensor ([E] on the previous page) Off.
Page 738: Original Feed And Separation
ARDF August, 2006 6.4.6 ORIGINAL FEED AND SEPARATION B132D120.WMF [A]: Pick-up roller [B]: Feed belt [C]: Separation roller [D]: Separation sensor Because of this mechanism, the machine does not feed more than one sheet at a time. Handling Paper> Handling Originals> Document Feed> FRR with Feed Belt) 6-22...
Page 739: Original Feed And Skew Correction
August, 2006 ARDF 6.4.7 ORIGINAL FEED AND SKEW CORRECTION B132D120.WMF [A]: Skew correction sensor [B]: Entrance roller [C]: Feed roller (Transport Roller 1) [D]: Interval sensor [E]: Scanning entrance roller After pick-up and separation: Skew correction sensor [A] detects the leading edge of the original The detection signal stops the entrance roller [B] for a set number of pulses to buckle the original and correct skew.
Page 740: Slip Detection
ARDF August, 2006 6.4.8 SLIP DETECTION B132D120.WMF [A]: Separation sensor [B]: Skew correction sensor These two sensors are used to measure the amount of slippage and to correct for this. The machine measures the time it takes for the original to get to the separation sensor [A] after the [Start] key is pressed.
Page 741 August, 2006 ARDF 6.4.9 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT (ONE-SIDED) B132D120.WMF The pick-up roller [A] feeds the original to the feed belt [B] and separation roller [C]. When the skew correction sensor [D] detects the leading edge of the original, it stops the feed motor for a set number of pulses to stop the entrance roller [E]. This buckles the leading edge of the original against the entrance roller to correct skew.
Page 742: Duplex Scanning
ARDF August, 2006 6.4.10 DUPLEX SCANNING B132D112.WMF 1. Side 1 of original is scanned, original waits. Upper junction gate [A] opens and sends to the upper inverter rollers. B132D113.WMF 2. Original feeds past the upper inverter rollers [B] and stops. Upper inverter junction gate [C] closes.
Page 743 August, 2006 ARDF B132D115.WMF 4. Side 2 of original is scanned, lower inverter junction gate [A] opens and directs to lower inverter table [B]. Original feeds. B132D117.WMF 5. Steps 1, 2, 3 repeat for original Lower inverter junction gate [C] and upper inverter junction gate [D] remain closed.
Page 744: Ardf Jam Detection
ARDF August, 2006 6.4.11 ARDF JAM DETECTION Jam Detection Sensor Layout B132D119.WMF B132D972.WMF Seven sensors detect jams in the original path at P1, P2, and P3 (These notations appear on the operation panel display when a jam occurs): [A]: Upper Inverter Sensor [B]: Separation Sensor [C]: Skew Correction Sensor [D]: Interval Sensor...
Page 745 August, 2006 ARDF Jam Detection Table The following notations are used in the table below: Orig. late: Leading edge not detected. The original fails to arrive at the sensor site at the correct time. Orig. lag: Trailing edge not detected. The original fails to leave the sensor site at the correct time.
Page 746: Scanner Unit
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 6.5 SCANNER UNIT 6.5.1 OVERVIEW B132D101A.WMF 1. Scanner HP Sensor 9. Scanner Motor 2. ARDF Exposure Glass 10. Scanner Fan Motor - Right 3. White Plate 11. Lens Block 4. Exposure Lamp (Xenon) 12. Polygon Motor 5.
Page 747 August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT 6.5.2 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION B132D102.WMF The machine uses five sensors on three APS boards to detect the size of the original on the exposure glass. [A]: APS1. (W1 and W2) detects original width [B]: APS2. (L1 and L2) detects original length [C]: APS3.
Page 748 SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 L1 L2 B132D973.WMF The table shows the sensor output for each paper size. If an original is on the exposure glass, you can check the sensor output with SP4301 (APS Confirm). SP4301 A4/A3 LT/DLT Display 11" x 17" 000 11111 —...
Page 749 August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT Detection Timing When the power is on, the APS sensors are always active, but the CPU checks their signals only after the platen is lowered. Book Mode In the Book mode (when the ARDF is open), the CPU checks the APS sensors and determines the original size after [Start] is pressed.
Page 750: Scanner Drive
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 6.5.3 SCANNER DRIVE B132D103.WMF [A]: Scanner motor (a dc stepper motor) drives the 1st and 2nd scanner with wires and pulleys. [B]: 1st scanner [C]: 2nd scanner [D]: Scanner HP sensor. Stops and reverses the scanner motor when the scanner reaches the home position.
Page 751 August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT 6.5.4 SCANNER UNIT FANS AND ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER B132D104.WMF [A]: Scanner cooling fan (front) [B]: Scanner cooling fan (rear) [C]: Scanner exhaust fan Condensation on the mirrors can cause: Running, smearing and image borders Printing completely black or gray pages Fans The scanner cooling fans (front, rear) pull cool air into the scanner unit.
Page 752: Dust Detection
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 6.5.5 DUST DETECTION Overview When an original is put on the original feed table of the ARDF, the ARDF exposure glass is checked for dust. The dust check is done before the first original is scanned. This is done only once at the beginning of a job.
Page 753: What Happens If Dust Is Detected?
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT What Happens if Dust is Detected? If dust is detected, the position where the scanner stops below the ARDF exposure glass to scan the original is moved by 0.7 mm. The scanning position can be shifted two times in 0.7 mm increments, towards the scanning reference point at the upper left corner of the exposure glass.
Page 754: How Is The Dust Detected?
SCANNER UNIT August, 2006 How is the Dust Detected? To detect dust on the ARDF exposure glass, the ARDF transport belt turns and the CCD scans this belt. The ARDF transport belt has four grooves cut across it in the main scan direction. These grooves are recessed.
Page 755: The Effects Of Sp Mode Settings On Dust Detection
August, 2006 SCANNER UNIT The Effects of SP Mode Settings on Dust Detection The settings of some SP codes control how dust detection is done. SP4020 001. Switches the dust warning on and off (default: off). When this SP is on, a warning is issued if the check detects dust on the ARDF exposure glass or the white plate above the exposure glass.
Page 756: Image Processing
IMAGE PROCESSING August, 2006 6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING 6.6.1 OVERVIEW : ASIC Chips Lamp, M otor, Sensor VSBCNT Analog Scanner Control AD Conversion LVDS drv. ARDF Operation Panel IPU (BICU) XDF_FGATE LVDS rsv. UART LIBRA CPU Bus Line Correction UBIC PC Card Around CPU RGB Image Processing : DFID...
Page 757: Sbu (Sensor Board Unit)
August, 2006 IMAGE PROCESSING 6.6.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT) The VPU (Video Processor Unit) does the following functions: Black level correction White level correction Gradation calibration ADS control (Background Density) (*ADS: Auto image Density Selection) Creating the SBU test pattern Operation Summary The signals from the 3-line CCD, one line for each color (R, G, B) and 2 analog signals per line (ODD, EVEN), are sampled by the ASIC and converted to digital...
Page 758: Ipu (Image Processing Unit)
IMAGE PROCESSING August, 2006 6.6.3 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT) The IPU does the following: Controls the scanner Processes the image signals from the SBU and sends them over the PCI bus to the controller memory Receives the image processing signals sent over the PCI bus from the controller memory, processes them, then outputs them to the VGAVD.
Page 759: Laser Unit
August, 2006 LASER UNIT 6.7 LASER UNIT 6.7.1 OVERVIEW B132D002.WMF NOTE: LSDB = Laser Synchronization Detection Board 1. WTL Lens (C) 10. LSDB (M Rear) 2. WTL Lens (Y) 11. LSDB (K Rear) 3. Dual-Layer f Lens (C, Y) 12. Dual-Layer f Lens (M, K) 4.
Page 760: Ld Unit
LASER UNIT August, 2006 6.7.2 LD UNIT There is an LD unit for each color, and each LD unit uses a two-beam system. A photo diode (PD) in each LD unit detects the light emitted from the LD unit. The output of the PD is fed back to the LD control board.
Page 761: Optical Paths
August, 2006 LASER UNIT 6.7.3 OPTICAL PATHS B132D001.WMF 1. WTL Lens (Y) 7. WTL Lens (K) 2. WTL Lens (C) 8. Dust-shield Glass 9. Dust-shield Glass 3. Dual-layer f Lens (C, Y) 10. Dust-shield Glass 4. Polygon Motor 11. Dust-shield Glass 5.
Page 762: Optical Path
LASER UNIT August, 2006 Optical Path All four latent images (C, M, Y, K) are written at approximately the same time. The laser diode turn-on times for each color are timed with drum rotation and paper feed. Refer to the illustration on the previous page. The optical path for each color is as follows: Cylindrical lens (laser beam correction in each LD unit) (Not shown)
Page 763: Image Position Correction (Music)
August, 2006 LASER UNIT 6.7.4 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION (MUSIC) What does MUSIC do? MUSIC is the Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction. Three MUSIC sensors above the ITB read three MUSIC sensor patterns made by the machine on the ITB. The machine uses the results to adjust: The machine adjusts the start timing for the laser at the start of the main scan.
Page 764: Location Of The Music Sensors
LASER UNIT August, 2006 Location of the MUSIC Sensors B132D301.WMF The sensors [A] are below the ITB. A roller [B] opposite the sensors pushes the transfer belt against the sensors. This makes sure that the sensors read the patterns accurately. 6-48...
Page 765: How Is Music Done?
August, 2006 LASER UNIT How is MUSIC Done? [A]: Rear MUSIC sensor [B]: Center MUSIC sensor [C]: Front MUSIC sensor [D]: Main scan MUSIC patterns [E]: Sub scan MUSIC patterns The MUSIC sensors [A], [B], and [C] read the MUSIC patterns from the ITB. The main scan MUSIC sensor pattern [D] consists of patches for each color (M, C, Y) beside the black (K) color patch.
Page 766 LASER UNIT August, 2006 Vertical Position in the Test Pattern Target Actual Sensor Output B132D970A.WMF This diagram shows a close-up view of the sub-scan test pattern. K is the reference, and the positions of CMY are adjusted with reference to the K pattern.
Page 767: Rd Mirror Position Adjustment
August, 2006 LASER UNIT 3rd Mirror Position Adjustment B132D003.WMF [1]: 3rd Mirror (Y) [2]: 3rd Mirror (C) [3]: 3rd Mirror (M) [4]: Mirror Adjustment Motors ( [5]: Temperature Sensors Each color Yellow [1], Cyan [2], Magenta [3] has a mirror. The machine uses the mirror motors ( ) to adjust the position of each mirror to correct color registration errors on the ITB in the main scan direction.
Page 768: Photoconductor Units (Pcu)
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) August, 2006 6.8 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) 6.8.1 OVERVIEW OF TANDEM PCU B132D001.WMF 1. Laser Unit 6. Development Unit (M) 2. Development Unit (Y) 7. Drum (M) 3. Drum (Y) 8. Development Unit (K) 4. Development Unit (C) 9.
Page 769: Around The Drum
August, 2006 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) 6.8.2 AROUND THE DRUM B132D977.WMF 1. Developer Cartridge 8. Lubricant Brush Roller 2. Development Roller 9. Cleaning Brush Roller 3. Potential Sensor 10. Waste Toner Collection Coil 4. Charge Roller Cleaning Roller 11. Quenching Lamp (QL) 5.
Page 770: Drum Drive
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) August, 2006 Drum Drive B132D204.WMF [A]: Drum motor [B]: Drum motor coupling [C]: Drum shaft Each PCU (Y, C, M, K) has an independent drum motor. The drum motor [A] rotates the drum motor coupling [B] and drum motor shaft [C]. During black-and-white copying and printing, only the black drum (K) rotates.
Page 771: Drum Charge
August, 2006 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) Drum Charge B132D204.WMF [A]: Drum [B]: Charge roller [C]: Charge roller cleaning roller The charger roller [B] above the drum [A] charges the drum. The charge roller cleaning roller [C] touches the charge roller and cleans it. A gear on the rear of the drum shaft turns the charge roller in the opposite direction of the drum.
Page 772: Drum Cleaning
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) August, 2006 Drum Cleaning B132D203.WMF Each drum unit has a cleaning brush roller [A] and a cleaning blade [F] to remove toner from the drum after image transfer. [A]: Cleaning brush roller Turns counter-clockwise, brushes unused toner from the drum surface, and pushes the toner into a well where it is caught by the waste toner collection coil [B]: Waste toner collection coil...
Page 773: Drum Ventilation
August, 2006 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) Drum Ventilation B132D214.WMF A Peltier unit [A] on the right side of the copier dries air before it is sent through a common duct [B] to the PCUs. This prevents condensation around the drums. The polarity of this Peltier is set so the left side [C] is the cold side and the right [D] is the hot side.
Page 774 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) August, 2006 The temperature/humidity sensor at the black PCU detects the relative humidity inside the machine. When the relative humidity stays at 60% for 10 minutes: 1) The Peltier unit turns ON. 2) The Peltier circulation fan and PCU fans turn on together and run at half- speed.
Page 775: Ozone Ventilation
August, 2006 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) Ozone Ventilation B132D962.WMF The ozone fan [A] pulls air from around the drums through the ozone filter [B] and then expels the filtered air from the machine. 6-59...
Page 776: Development Unit
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) August, 2006 6.8.3 DEVELOPMENT UNIT Overview B132D211.WMF [A]: Developer Cartridge [B]: Developer Augers [C]: Development Roller [D]: TD Sensor Development method: Dual-component development Agitation: Two augers Development unit drive: PCU motor, 1 motor for each PCU (Y, C, M, K) Development bias: Development bias power pack 6-60...
Page 777: Development Unit Operation
August, 2006 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) Development Unit Operation B132D212.WMF [A]: Developer Cartridge [B]: Developer Augers [C]: Development Roller [D]: Doctor Blade [E]: Development Bias Terminal Each PCU is supplied by a separate developer cartridge [A] (Y, C, M, K). When a new developer cartridge is installed and the tape is removed, all the developer falls into the development unit, across the full width of the development unit.
Page 778: Development, Pcu Drive
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) August, 2006 Development, PCU Drive B132D213.WMF [A]: PCU Motor A motor and timing belt behind each PCU drives all the rollers in the PCU. (The drum is driven by the drum motor.) [B]: Timing Belt [C]: Developer Augers [D]: Development Roller [E]: Cleaning Brush Roller [F]: Lubricant Brush Roller...
Page 779: Toner Supply
August, 2006 TONER SUPPLY 6.9 TONER SUPPLY 6.9.1 OVERVIEW Each PCU has a toner supply unit. B132D906.BMP 1. Soft Toner Cartridge (STC) 5. Sub Hopper 2. Flexible Tubing 6. Toner Supply Clutch 3. Toner Pump 7. Toner End Sensor 4. Toner Pump Clutch Toner supply: Sub hopper, toner supply clutch Toner transport:...
Page 780 TONER SUPPLY August, 2006 1. Soft Toner Cartridge (STC) Four toner cartridges are set in the toner hopper. They are inserted left to right in this order Y, C, M and K. 2. Flexible Tubing A flexible tube connects the toner cartridge to the toner pump. 3.
Page 781: Toner Supply Mechanism
August, 2006 TONER SUPPLY 6.9.2 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM B132D216.WMF B132D217.WMF The toner pump [A] pulls toner into the sub hopper [B] from the toner cartridge [C], through the flexible tube [D]. The toner hopper motor controls the mechanism, through the toner pump clutch [E]. Toner cartridge sub hopper The toner pump supplies toner to the sub hopper.
Page 782: Toner Cartridge
TONER SUPPLY August, 2006 6.9.3 TONER CARTRIDGE B132D219.WMF Collapsible Sides [A]: Shutter pin B132D218.WMF [B]: Toner supply port plug [C]: Toner supply port [D]: ID chip Each toner cartridge is installed in a bin of the toner hopper. When the bin door is closed, a shutter pin [A] forces open a plug [B]. This opens the toner supply port [C] and toner can flow from the cartridge.
Page 783 August, 2006 TONER SUPPLY B132I108A.WMF A toner cartridge (STC) must be set with its color ID label [A] facing out. If a toner cartridge (STC) is inserted with its label facing into the machine, this will cause a "Toner Cartridge Setting Error". Important At elevations 1,000 meters (3,280 ft.) above sea level, the toner cartridge packs may expand due to the difference in air pressure, preventing them from being...
Page 784: Toner End Sensors
TONER SUPPLY August, 2006 6.9.4 TONER END SENSORS B132D217A.WMF The toner end sensors are below the sub hoppers for each color [A]: K (Black) [B]: M (Magenta) [C]: C (Cyan) [D]: Y (Yellow) The toner end sensor monitors the amount of toner in the sub hopper and issues the near-end alert when toner runs low in the sub hopper.
Page 785: Toner End
August, 2006 TONER SUPPLY Toner end After a toner near-end alert is output, the number of pages that can be printed until toner end is determined by the amount of toner that remains in the sub hopper. After the toner near-end alert has been issued, the toner end alert is issued by one of two counters, whichever goes over the limit first: Page count.
Page 786: Waste Toner Collection
WASTE TONER COLLECTION August, 2006 6.10 WASTE TONER COLLECTION 6.10.1 WASTE TONER PATH B132D215.WMF [A]: Waste Toner Collection Coils PCU (Y) PCU (C) PCU (M) PCU (K) ITB Unit PTR Unit [B]: Horizontal Waste Toner Transport Coil [C]: Vertical Waste Toner Transport Coil [D]: Diagonal Waste Toner Transport Coil [E]: Waste Toner Bottle Transport Coil [F]: Waste Toner Bottle Distribution Coil...
Page 787 August, 2006 WASTE TONER COLLECTION [A]: Waste Toner Collection Coils Six waste toner collection coils (1 for each PCU and 1 each for the ITB and transfer roller) transport waste toner away from these components after cleaning. The PCU motors drive coils .
Page 788: Waste Toner Unit Motors
WASTE TONER COLLECTION August, 2006 6.10.2 WASTE TONER UNIT MOTORS B132D220.WMF [A]: Waste Toner Transport Motor Drives the waste toner bottle transport coil [C] and the vertical waste toner transport coil [D]. [B]: Waste Toner Distribution Motor Drives the waste toner bottle distribution coil [E]. This motor does not constantly turn.
Page 789: Waste Toner Collection Unit Sensors
August, 2006 WASTE TONER COLLECTION 6.10.3 WASTE TONER COLLECTION UNIT SENSORS B132D221.WMF Three sensors in the waste toner monitor the operation of waste toner collection and trigger an alert on the operation panel or issue an SC code. [A]: Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor [B]: Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full Sensor [C]: Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor...
Page 790: Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full Sensor
WASTE TONER COLLECTION August, 2006 Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full Sensor When the level of the waste toner rises high enough: The pressure of the top of the stack of waste toner pushes a piece of silicone rubber, then the film pushes a feeler into the gap of the sensor [B]. The blocked sensor signals the machine that the waste toner bottle is nearly full.
Page 791: Process Control
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL 6.11 PROCESS CONTROL 6.11.1 OVERVIEW In this machine, there are two processes. Potential control. Adjusts the image creation process (charge, development bias, and LD power) to achieve the target toner coverage. During potential control several series of patterns are created at prescribed times. The potential sensor and ID sensor read these patterns.
Page 792: Components Used During Process Control
PROCESS CONTROL August 2006 6.11.2 COMPONENTS USED DURING PROCESS CONTROL Potential Sensor Copier Potential Charge Roller Sensor Probe Drawer Drum Surface Potential Connector -900V (Max.) Development Roller Range: -350 to -800 V DC def. = -500V Potential Sensor PP Max. Output: -1000V Transfer Roller 1.5 kV (Normal Use) B132D901.WMF...
Page 793: Id Sensors
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL ID Sensors Rear ITB (Image Transfer Belt) 40 mm 40 mm Front 150 mm B132D902.WMF There are two ID sensors above the surface of the ITB: The black ID sensor (rear) detects the black ID sensor pattern (K). The color ID sensor (front) detects the three color ID sensor patterns (Y, C, M).
Page 794 PROCESS CONTROL August 2006 During process control, the creation of the patterns is timed so the Magenta, Cyan and Yellow patterns are transferred to the ITB at approximately the same time. The color ID sensor then reads the color ID sensor patterns in the order M, C, Y. Note that the K pattern is read by the black ID sensor at approximately the same time the Cyan pattern is being read.
Page 795: Temperature/Humidity Sensors
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL TD Sensor B132D905.BMP There is a TD sensor [A] below the development unit of each PCU. The TD sensor directly measures the amount of toner in the developer/toner mixture. Unlike previous machines, this TD sensor is not in direct contact with the developer/toner mixture.
Page 796: List Of Process Control Acronyms
PROCESS CONTROL August 2006 List of Process Control Acronyms The potential control phase of process control involves many adjustments. Here is list of acronyms used in the descriptions of process control adjustments. Acronym Description Charge DC bias Development charge bias Development charge bias after Vr (residual potential) adjustment Drum potential after the drum is charged by the charge roller.
Page 797: Important Sp Codes Related To Process Control
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL Important SP Codes Related to Process Control This table lists the SP codes that are associated with the most important elements of process control. For more, please refer to Section "5. Service Tables". SP3501 001 Target Effect in Potential Control Initial Range...
Page 798: Potential Control
PROCESS CONTROL August 2006 6.11.3 POTENTIAL CONTROL When is Potential Control Done? 1. Initial process control self-check. The process control self-check is done automatically after the machine is turned on, if the pressure roller thermistor detects that the fusing temperature is below 100°C (adjust this temp with SP3554 001).
Page 799: What Is Done During Potential Control?
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL What is Done During Potential Control? Potential Control Process Flow Relating SC Codes SC436 to 439: Potential Sensor Error :vd Detect VdHome SC316 to 319: AC Bias Charge Adjustment Error Adjust AC Charge Pre-Processing SC497: Temperature and Humidity Sensor Error (Charge Roller) Sensor Check Agitate Developer...
Page 800 PROCESS CONTROL August 2006 First, a check confirms that all the PCU are set correctly. NOTE: Please keep in mind that all the readings and calculations described below are done in each of the four PCUs. For simplicity, however, the discussions are limited to what occurs in a single PCU.
Page 801 August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL Calculate Development Gamma The laser diodes write a 10-grade potential sensor pattern on each drum. To make the different densities, the machine changes the PWM duty of the laser diodes. B132D925.WMF At this step, the development gamma (development capacity) is measured. The necessary potentials are calculated.
Page 802 PROCESS CONTROL August 2006 Adjust Vpl The LD power is adjusted in order to get to the target Vpl (the Vpl value after correction for Vr) After correction for Vr, the value of Vpl must be within 5V. Vpl (LD Power) Adjust Errors SC Codes SP3821 Procon OK? For More Details:...
Page 803: Toner Supply Control
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL 6.11.4 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL Overview The toner supply method can be selected with SP3301 001-004. 0: Fixed supply mode (used for testing only; do not use this mode except during some troubleshooting procedures as described in section 4) 1: PID (Proportional Integral Differentiation) control mode (default) This section describes only PID control because only PID control is used in the field.
Page 804 PROCESS CONTROL August 2006 2. Page interval process control (Vsp detection between pages) This function operates only when SP3042 001 (Vtref correction) is set to "ON" (default). The Vsp ID sensor pattern is created between the page images on the ITB (Default: Every 10 pages).
Page 805: Toner Supply Operation Flow
August 2006 PROCESS CONTROL Toner Supply Operation Flow Page Interval Process Control (SP3042 001 Vtref Calibration Mode ON) Create ID Sensor Patterns Read ID Sensor Patterns Determine Amount of Toner Compare Reading with Threshold Range for Toner Adjustment Between Pages Toner Supply Control Method: Correct Light...
Page 806: Image Transfer And Paper Transfer
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER August 2006 6.12 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 6.12.1 OVERVIEW B132D301.WMF 1. Image Transfer Rollers 8. PTR Cleaning Blade 9. PTR Waste Toner Collection Coil 2. ITB 10. PTR Cleaning Brush roller 3. Transfer Power Pack 11.
Page 807 August 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 1. Image Transfer Rollers ( The positive charge applied by the transfer power pack to these sponge rollers (one for each PCU) pulls the developed images from the drums down onto the ITB. 2.
Page 808 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER August 2006 11. PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) Provides pressure when the ITB and paper pass between this roller and the PTR below during image transfer from ITB to paper. 12. ITB Bias Roller The transfer power pack applies a negative charge to this roller to push the negatively-charged toner image from the ITB to the paper.
Page 809: Itb Drive
August 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 6.12.2 ITB DRIVE B132D307.WMF [A]: ITB drive motor [B]: ITB drive roller [C]: ITB The ITB drive motor [A] drives the ITB drive roller [B]. All the other rollers inside the ITB are idle rollers. 6-93...
Page 810: Itb Lift
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER August 2006 6.12.3 ITB LIFT B132D310.WMF [A]: ITB lift motor [B]: ITB lift cam [C]: ITB lift sensor [D]: ITB [E]: Black print position [F]: Full-color print position The ITB lift motor [A] (a stepper motor) turns the ITB lift cam [B]. This cam lifts and lowers the ITB [D].
Page 811 August 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER When Black-and-White Mode is Selected: The motor turns the cam until the actuator goes out of the ITB lift sensor. The motor stops. With the left side of the ITB down, only the black (K) drum contacts the ITB. The machine automatically adjusts paper feed timing for black-and-white copying with only one drum.
Page 812: Transfer Power Pack
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER August 2006 6.12.4 TRANSFER POWER PACK B132D309.WMF [A]: Transfer power pack [B]: Image transfer roller terminals [C]: Image transfer rollers [D]: ITB [E]: ITB bias roller terminal [F]: ITB bias roller To transfer the images from drum to ITB: The transfer power pack [A] supplies a positive charge (1 kV 24 to 30 A) to the image transfer roller terminals [B] The four terminals charge the image transfer rollers [C]...
Page 813: Paper Transfer And Separation
August 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 6.12.5 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION P . P B132D304.WMF This machine employs a repulsive force bias system to transfer the image on the ITB to paper. The transfer power pack [A] applies a negative bias to the ITB bias roller [B]. The negative bias from the back side of the ITB applies a repulsive force to the toner on the ITB surface.
Page 814: Ptr Cleaning
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER August 2006 6.12.6 PTR CLEANING B132D303.WMF [A]: PTR cleaning brush roller [B]: PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) [C]: PTR cleaning blade [D]: PTR lubricant bar [E]: PTR waste toner collection coil [F]: PTR motor The PTR cleaning brush roller [A], driven by the PTR motor [F], removes toner from the PTR [B] because these rollers rotate in opposite directions.
Page 815: Itb Cleaning
August 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 6.12.7 ITB CLEANING B132D306.WMF [A]: ITB cleaning brush roller [B]: ITB (Image Transfer Belt) [C]: ITB cleaning blade [D]: Brush roller cleaning roller [E]: Waste toner collection coil The PTR motor ( 6.12.6) rotates the ITB cleaning brush roller [A] against the bottom of the ITB [B] while it passes above.
Page 816: Itb Speed Control
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER August 2006 6.12.8 ITB SPEED CONTROL B132D308.WMF [A]: MUSIC sensors ( 6.7.4, 6.11.3) ID Sensor – K , ID Sensor Y, M, C [B]: ITB position sensor 1 [C]: ITB position sensor 2 [D]: ITB encoder strip scale For full color and black-and-white printing on plain paper, and for thin paper, the ITB speed is 282 mm/s.
Page 817: Itb Ventilation
August 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 6.12.9 ITB VENTILATION B132D967.WMF The image transfer fan [A] draws in cool air and blows it across the top of the drawer unit to cool the ITB. 6-101...
Page 818: Paper Feed
PAPER FEED August 2006 6.13 PAPER FEED 6.13.1 OVERVIEW B132D600A.WMF 1. Tandem Tray (Tray 1) 11. Double Feed Detection LED 2. Left Tray Paper Sensor 12. Bypass Tray 3. Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) 13. Relay Sensor 4. Universal Tray (Tray 2) 14.
Page 819 August 2006 PAPER FEED Tray Capacities The machine has four paper trays: Tandem Tray (Tray 1). 1550 + 1550 sheets Universal Tray (Tray 2) 550 sheets Universal Tray (Tray 3) 550 sheets Bypass tray. 100 sheets. Built-in Feed Stations Paper feed and separation. Standard FRR system with a torque limiter for paper separation and feed.
Page 820: Drive
PAPER FEED August 2006 6.13.2 DRIVE B132D923.WMF An independent paper feed motor [A] drives the rollers in each tray. The motor also drives grip rollers [B], which pull the paper out of the tray. This mechanism is identical for each tray. A vertical transport sensor [C] at each feed station detects paper jams.
Page 821: Tray And Paper Lift Mechanism – Tray 2,3
August 2006 PAPER FEED 6.13.3 TRAY AND PAPER LIFT MECHANISM – TRAY 2,3 Bottom Plate Lift B132D610.WMF Tray lift operates in this order: [A]: Tray lift motor switches on [B]: Coupling rotates [C]: Pin locks coupling at shaft [D]: Shaft rotates [E]: Lift arm raised by the rotation of the shaft [F]: Bottom plate pushed up by lift arm NOTE: The universal trays (Tray 2, Tray 3) each have a paper near end sensor...
Page 822: Lift Sensor
PAPER FEED August 2006 Lift Sensor B132D934.WMF B132D935.WMF Tray lift motor on, pick-up solenoid [A] on, pick-up roller [B] lowers. When the top sheet of paper reaches the proper paper feed level, actuator [C] on the pick-up roller support [D] activates the tray lift sensor [E], and the lift motor stops.
Page 823: Paper Feed And Separation Mechanism
August 2006 PAPER FEED 6.13.4 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM Feed and Separation at Standby: No Paper Present B132D936.WMF While waiting for the first sheet to feed and between sheets, the feed roller [A] must not rotate. However, the grip roller [B] must turn, so that any paper coming up the vertical transport path can continue to feed.
Page 824: Paper Feed And Separation
PAPER FEED August 2006 Paper Feed and Separation B132D937.WMFF If a paper feed station is not selected, its separation roller solenoid [A] stays off and the separation roller [B] can turn freely. When the paper feed station is selected and the start key is pressed, the following mechanisms activate: Separation roller solenoid [A] separation roller [B] contacts feed roller [E]...
Page 825: Separation Roller Release Mechanism
August 2006 PAPER FEED Separation Roller Release Mechanism B132D938.WMF B132D939.WMF Normally, the separation roller [A] and feed roller [B] are not in contact. However, when the feed station is selected, the separation roller solenoid [C] pushes the separation roller against the feed roller. This mechanism has advantages: When the paper feed motor turns on, the separation roller rotates.
Page 826: Paper Near-End And Paper End – Trays 2 And 3
PAPER FEED August 2006 6.13.5 PAPER NEAR-END AND PAPER END – TRAYS 2 AND 3 B132D940.WMF The paper near end sensor [A] is in the lift motor assembly. It can detect four levels of remaining paper. The paper end sensor [A] receives light reflected from the paper below [B] until the last sheet has been fed.
Page 827: Paper Size Detection
August 2006 PAPER FEED 6.13.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION Tandem Tray (Tray 1) The tandem tray does not have paper size switches. Every time the paper size is changed by moving the front and back fences, you must enter the selected paper size with SP5959-001.
Page 828 PAPER FEED August 2006 Paper Size Switch Output Paper Size Switch 12" x 18" SEF 12" x 18" 11111 A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm 11001 B4 SEF 257 x 394 mm 10011 A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm 01001 A4 LEF 210 x 297 mm 11000...
Page 829: Paper Tray Heaters
August 2006 PAPER FEED 6.13.7 PAPER TRAY HEATERS B132D608A.WMF Two heaters, one below the tandem tray [A] and one below the bottom tray [B], prevent condensation around the feed rollers and keep paper dry. This tray heater turns on automatically: When the main power switch is turned off When the machine enters auto off mode NOTE: These tray heaters are not connected before the machine is shipped from...
Page 830: Tandem Tray – Tray 1
PAPER FEED August 2006 6.13.8 TANDEM TRAY – TRAY 1 Overview B132D942.WMF The left tray [A] and right tray [B] each hold 1,550 sheets. Paper feeds from the right tray. When the paper in the right tray runs out, paper in the left tray is automatically pushed into the right tray and paper feed resumes.
Page 831: Connecting The Left And Right Sides Of The Tray
August 2006 PAPER FEED Connecting the Left and Right Sides of the Tray B132D944.WMF B132D943.WMF B132D945.WMF When there is paper in the left tray, lock lever [A] in the left tray catches the pin [B] in the right tray. During copying if there is no paper in the left tray: Right tray lock solenoid [C] turns on, which releases lock lever [A].
Page 832: Paper Lift/Remaining Paper Detection
PAPER FEED August 2006 Paper Lift/Remaining Paper Detection The machine detects when the tray 1 has been placed in the machine by monitoring the tray set signal through the connector. B132D946.WMF When the machine detects that the tray is in the machine, the right tray paper sensor [1] (under the tray) checks immediately whether there is paper in the right tandem tray.
Page 833 August 2006 PAPER FEED B132D947.WMF Paper remaining: The amount of paper remaining in the tray is detected by which combination of the three paper height sensors [1] are actuated by the actuator on the left rail as the bottom plate rises. With the actuator below paper height sensor (the bottom sensor), no sensor is actuated and the display indicates the tray is full.
Page 834: Fence Drive
PAPER FEED August 2006 Fence Drive B132D948.WMF The side fences [A] of the right tray open only when paper in the left tray goes to the right tray. The side fence solenoids [B] turn on and open the side fences. The side fences move out until the open sensors [C] activate.
Page 835: Rear Fence Drive
August 2006 PAPER FEED Rear Fence Drive B132D950.WMF B132D949.WMF Left tray paper sensor [A] detects paper, right tray paper sensor does not detect paper: Rear fence motor [B] (a DC motor in the left tray) turns on and rotates counter- clockwise Rear fence motor drives rear fence against the paper stack, paper stack moves toward right tray...
Page 836: Tray Side-To-Side Positioning
PAPER FEED August 2006 Tray Side-to-side Positioning B132D952.WMF B132D951.WMF When the feed tray is set in the feed unit, the side-to-side positioning plate [A] presses the feed tray against the stopper [B]. By moving the positioning plate, the tray position can be changed to adjust the side-to-side registration.
Page 837: Tray Positioning Mechanism – Trays 1 To 3
August 2006 PAPER FEED 6.13.9 TRAY POSITIONING MECHANISM – TRAYS 1 TO 3 B132D953.WMF When the tray is placed in the feed unit, the lock lever [A] drops behind the lock plate [B] on the support bracket to lock the tray in the proper position. 6-121...
Page 838: Bypass Tray
PAPER FEED August 2006 6.13.10 BYPASS TRAY Bypass Feed and Separation B132D954.WMF B132D603.WMF The bypass tray [A] opens from the right side of the machine. Bypass Tray Operation Sequence: Bypass feed motor [B] Bypass feed clutch [C] Pick-up roller [D] Pick-up solenoid (see the next page) Feed roller [E] and separation roller [F]...
Page 839: Bypass Tray Paper End Detection
August 2006 PAPER FEED Bypass Tray Paper End Detection B132D604.WMF When the paper runs out, the paper end feeler [A] drops through the cutout in the bypass paper end sensor [B]. [C]: Pickup solenoid 6-123...
Page 840: Bypass Paper Size Detection
PAPER FEED August 2006 Bypass Paper Size Detection B132D602.WMF Paper Width When the front fence [A] and rear fence [B] are moved to the sides of the paper in the bypass tray: The metal actuator [C] moves to a position on the sensor strip [D]. The machine reads the position of the actuator on the strip to determine the paper size.
Page 841 August 2006 PAPER FEED The operator can specify non-standard paper sizes for feeding from the bypass tray. The size must be within the range shown in the illustration. 148~457 mm (5.8" ~ 17.9") 100 ~ 305 mm (3.9" ~ 12") B132D955.WMF NOTE: Use SP1905 to adjust the bypass feed clutch operation if thick paper often jams...
Page 842: Paper Registration
PAPER FEED August 2006 6.13.11 PAPER REGISTRATION Overview B132D941.WMF The registration rollers [A] and registration sensor [B] handle paper fed from six sources: [C]: Tandem tray and two universal trays [D]: Duplex unit [E]: Bypass tray The bypass tray feeds paper directly to the registration rollers. The grip rollers [F] feed paper from the trays into the vertical transport path to the registration rollers.
Page 843: Paper Registration Drive
August 2006 PAPER FEED Paper Registration Drive B132D607.WMF The registration motor [A] stops when the registration sensor [B] detects the paper at the registration rollers [C]. Because the paper is still feeding, the paper buckles against the registration rollers and corrects skew. NOTE: Use SP1003 to adjust the registration motor timing for each paper feed station or the duplex tray.
Page 844: Jam Removal At Paper Registration
PAPER FEED August 2006 Jam Removal at Paper Registration B132D617.WMF If a paper misfeed occurs between the vertical transport rollers and the registration rollers, the next sheet is already on its way up from the paper tray. The paper in the feed path must be stopped to avoid paper jams.
Page 845: Paper Type And Double-Feed Detection
August 2006 PAPER FEED 6.13.12 PAPER TYPE AND DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION B132D941.WMF [A]: Registration Rollers [B]: Double-Feed Detection LED (LED) [C]: Double-Feed Detection Sensor (Receptor) After skew correction at the registration rollers, a sensor pair checks the translucence of each sheet. This function makes sure that each sheet of paper fed is of the same type and also detects double-feeds.
Page 846 PAPER FEED August 2006 The amount of light received by the double-feed detection sensor is referred to a lookup table that stores the values of the translucence of paper types. Paper type check. If the amount of light measured is within the range of translucence for the paper selected for the copy job, no action is taken.
Page 847 August 2006 PAPER FEED Paper Types The machine can distinguish between the following paper types using the output from the double-feed detection sensor / double-feed detection LED. Paper Type Paper Weight Range Translucence (UP Mode) HIGH Tracing Paper Thin Paper 14 to 19 lb Bond 52 to 71 g/m Normal...
Page 848: Fusing, Paper Exit
FUSING, PAPER EXIT August 2006 6.14 FUSING, PAPER EXIT 6.14.1 OVERVIEW B132D401.WMF 1. Cleaning Roller – Fusing Belt 12. Cleaning Felt Roller Lubrication Roller 13. Fusing Lamp (x1 Pressure Roller) 2. Fusing Lamp (x1 –Hot Roller) 14. Pressure Roller ( 50) 3.
Page 849 August 2006 FUSING, PAPER EXIT The fusing belt system applies heat to the belt at three points: the hot roller, the heating roller, and the pressure roller. This allows the use of smaller rollers and conserves space. As less pressure is necessary during fusing, less torque is required.
Page 850: Thermistors, Thermostats
THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS August 2006 6.15 THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS B132D402.WMF 1. Hot Roller Thermistor 5. Heating Roller Temperature Sensor 2. Hot Roller Thermostats 6. Pressure Roller Thermostats 3. Heating Roller Thermostats 7. Heating Roller Thermistor 4. Pressure Roller Thermistor Each roller in the fusing unit has one thermistor and two thermostats. 6-134...
Page 851: Fusing Unit Drive
August 2006 THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS 6.15.1 FUSING UNIT DRIVE B132D404.WMF [A]: Fusing/exit motor [B]: Idle roller [C]: Hot roller [D]: Fusing belt [E]: Heating roller [F]: Pressure roller The fusing/exit motor [A] drives the fusing unit. Fusing exit motor [A]> Idle Roller [B]> Hot Roller [C]> Fusing Belt [D], Heating Roller [E], Pressure Roller [F].
Page 852: Lubrication And Cleaning
THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS August 2006 6.15.2 LUBRICATION AND CLEANING B132D401.WMF [A]: Fusing belt lubrication roller [B]: Fusing belt [C]: Hot roller [D]: Cleaning roller – fusing belt lubrication roller [E]: Cleaning felt roller [F]: Pressure roller The fusing unit uses two lubrication rollers saturated with silicone oil to prevent toner and paper dust from clinging to the fusing belt.
Page 853: Stripper Retraction
August 2006 THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS Stripper Retraction B132D980.WMF The pawls of the fusing belt strippers [A] and pressure roller strippers [B] touch the surfaces of the fusing belt and pressure roller during normal operation. These strippers are held in place with small springs. If paper does not separate from the fusing belt at [C], for example, the point of the stripper separates the paper from the fusing belt.
Page 854: Fusing Temperature Control
THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS August 2006 6.15.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL Basic Temperature Control The fusing unit has four fusing lamps: one in the hot roller (350W), two in the heating roller (590W x2), and one in the pressure roller (350W). The heating roller is the main source of heat to the fusing belt for fusing. The hot roller provides additional heat for fusing.
Page 855 August 2006 THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS Temperature Control Graph CPM Down Standby Standby Power ON Idling Start Machine Ready Job Start Job End B132D131.WMF Heating Roller Temperature Hot Roller Temperature Pressure Roller Temperature This table shows how temperature control is done in the different operation modes. Mode Heating Roller Hot Roller...
Page 856: Correction For Machine Internal Temperature
THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS August 2006 Correction for Machine Internal Temperature If the temperature inside the machine is less than 20 ºC, all target fusing temperatures are increased by 5 ºC. If the temperature inside the machine is more than 20 ºC, the standby temperature is decreased by 5 ºC.
Page 857: Fusing Unit Ventilation
August 2006 THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS 6.15.4 FUSING UNIT VENTILATION B132D964.WMF [A]: Fusing unit [B]: Heat sink [C]: Fusing cooling fan [D]: Fusing exhaust fan Heat rising from the fusing unit [A] collects around a heat sink [B]. The heat sink contains pipes with water that help to cool the hot air. The fusing cooling fan [C] pulls cool air into the machine and blows it over the heat sink.
Page 858: Duplex Unit
DUPLEX UNIT August 2006 6.16 DUPLEX UNIT 6.16.1 OVERVIEW B132D501.WMF 1. Relay Sensor 8. Duplex Transport Sensor 2 2. Inverter Entrance Roller 9. Duplex Transport Roller 1 3. Reverse Trigger Roller 10. Duplex Transport Sensor 1 4. Jogger Fences 11. Duplex Inverter Sensor 5.
Page 859: Duplex Drive
August 2006 DUPLEX UNIT 6.16.2 DUPLEX DRIVE [10] B132D505.WMF [11] B132D956.WMF Fusing/exit motor [1] Timing belt [2] Inverter entrance roller [3] Duplex inverter motor [4] Timing belt Transport rollers 1, 2 [5] + duplex positioning roller [6] Duplex inverter motor [4] Inverter exit roller [7] Duplex transport motor [8] Timing belt...
Page 860: Inverter Operation
DUPLEX UNIT August 2006 6.16.3 INVERTER OPERATION B132D506.WMF B132D507.WMF Inverter Feed-in and Jogging Just after the main switch is turned on: Duplex jogger motor [A] (a stepper motor) moves the jogger fences [B] to home position (determined by the duplex jogger HP sensor [C]). When the Start key is pressed: Motor [A] positions fences [B] 12 mm away from the selected paper size to wait for the paper.
Page 861: Inverter Feed-Out
August 2006 DUPLEX UNIT Inverter Feed-out B132D957.WMF B132D508.WMF [A]: Reverse trigger roller solenoid [B]: Reverse trigger roller [C]: Reverse roller [D]: Paper [E]: Inverter exit roller [F]: Relay sensor After jogging, each page is fed back as follows: Solenoid [A] pushes down roller [B]. Roller [B] contacts roller [C], catching the paper between the two rollers.
Page 862: Duplex Tray Feed
DUPLEX UNIT August 2006 6.16.4 DUPLEX TRAY FEED B132D958.WMF [A]: Junction gate solenoid [B]: Duplex junction gate [C]: Transport rollers 1, 2, 3, 4 [D]: Duplex transport sensors 1, 2, 3 After inversion: If duplex mode is not selected, the duplex junction gate solenoid [A] does not switch on to open the duplex junction gate [B].
Page 863: Duplex Interleave Feed
August 2006 DUPLEX UNIT 6.16.5 DUPLEX INTERLEAVE FEED The number of sheets that can be processed at a time depends on the size of the paper. The table below shows the order of page processing for a 14-page job. Odd numbers are the front sides of the pages, even numbers are the back sides.
Page 864 DUPLEX UNIT August 2006 4. 1st sheet, back page printed (pg. 2) B132D961.WMF 5. 4th sheet feeds, front page printed (pg.7) 6. 1st sheet exits (pg. 1 and 2) 7. 4th sheet feeds to duplex tray. 8. 2nd sheet, back page printed (pg. 4) 9.
Page 865: Duplex Unit Ventilation
August 2006 DUPLEX UNIT 6.16.6 DUPLEX UNIT VENTILATION B132D965.WMF [A]: Duplex Fan [B]: Rear Duplex Fan [C]: Front Duplex Fan The duplex fan [A] draws cool air into the duplex unit. The rear duplex fan [B] and front duplex fan [C] expel the heated air through vents on the left side of the machine.
Page 866: Paper Exit
PAPER EXIT August 2006 6.17 PAPER EXIT 6.17.1 FACE UP EXIT MECHANISM B132D504.WMF [A]: Inverter Junction Gate Solenoid [B]: Inverter Junction Gate [C]: Exit Sensor When the inverter is used (duplex mode, or face-down output): Inverter junction gate solenoid [A] Inverter junction gate [B] Open Paper goes down to the inverter...
Page 867: De-Curl Mechanism
August 2006 PAPER EXIT 6.17.2 DE-CURL MECHANISM B132D503.WMF [A]: Heat Pipe Roller [B]: Exit Rollers [C]: Heat Pipe Roller Fins [D]: Cooling Pipe Fan Immediately after paper leaves the fusing unit, it passes between the heat pipe roller [A] and the exit rollers [B]. The heat pipe roller absorbs heat from the paper.
Page 868: Paper Exit Cooling
PAPER EXIT August 2006 6.17.3 PAPER EXIT COOLING B132D966.WMF The paper exit fan [A] draws hot air from the paper exit area and expels it through a vent on the left side of the machine. 6-152...
Page 869: Energy Saver Modes
August 2006 PAPER EXIT 6.17.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES Stand-by Mode Operation Sw. Off -or- Auto Off Timer (1 min. to 240 min. / Default: 90 min.) Energy Saver Key ON -or- Panel Off Timer (10 s to 999 s / Default: 60 s) Key Operation Panel-Off Mode Operation Sw.
Page 870 PAPER EXIT August 2006 These modes are controlled by the following user tools. Panel off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Settings – Panel Off Timer (default 60 seconds). Maximum recovery time: 10 seconds Low power mode timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Settings – Energy Saver Timer (default 15 minutes).
Page 871 A3/11”x17” PAPER SIZE TRAY (Machine Code: B331) 06/09...
Page 872: Instrallation
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INSTRALLATION ..............B331-1 2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......... B331-2 2.1 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT........B331-2 3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS..........B331-4 3.1 SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION .............. B331-4 06/09...
Page 874 September 2006 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT 1. INSTALLATION For details about installing the A3/DLT Kit B331, please refer to the instructions you received with the instructions or the “1. Installation” in the main machine service manual. B331-1 06/09...
Page 875 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT September 2006 2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 2.1 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT NOTE: Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom plate lift wire. The procedure for the two wires is the same. B331R102.WMF 1.
Page 876 September 2006 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT B331R061.WMF NOTE: When re-installing the bottom plate lift wire: 1) Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B] and set the projection [C] in the hole [D]. 2) Position the wire as shown [E]. 3) Do not cross the wires.
Page 877: Detailed Descriptions
SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION September 2006 3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 3.1 SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION B331D201.WMF This tray mechanism is basically same as the tandem LCT. This tray bottom plate [A] is lifted through the tray wires [B] by the lift motor [C] rotation. There is no remaining paper capacity detection.
Page 878 LCT (LARGE CAPACITY TRAY) (Machine Code: B473) 06/09...
Page 879 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......... B473-1 1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS................B473-1 1.2 PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS ......... B473-2 1.3 PICK-UP SOLENOID................B473-3 1.4 PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES ....... B473-4 1.5 TRAY MOTOR..................B473-5 1.6 PAPER STACK SENSOR..............B473-5 1.7 PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT..............
Page 881: Replacement And Adjustment
September 2006 EXTERNAL COVERS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS B473R001.WMF [A]: Transport cover [B]: Transport cover hinge ( [C]: Rear cover ( [D]: Top cover ( [E]: Right cover ( [F]: Front cover ( B473-1 06/09...
Page 882: Pick-Up/Feed/Separation Rollers
PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS September 2006 1.2 PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS B473R002.WMF B473R003.WMF [A]: Open the transport cover [B]: Bracket cover ( [C]: Pick-up roller ( [D]: Feed roller ( [E]: Separation roller ( B473-2 06/09...
Page 883: Pick-Up Solenoid
September 2006 PICK-UP SOLENOID 1.3 PICK-UP SOLENOID B473R004.WMF Rear cover ( Open the transport cover ( 1.2) Bracket cover ( 2.2) [A]: Pick-up solenoid ( B473-3 06/09...
Page 884: Paper End Sensor, Upper Cover Switches
PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES September 2006 1.4 PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES B473R005.WMF B473R006.WMF Open the top cover. Right cover ( 1.1) [A]: Paper end sensor ( [B]: Upper cover switches 1, 2 ( B473-4 06/09...
Page 885: Tray Motor
September 2006 TRAY MOTOR 1.5 TRAY MOTOR B473R007.WMF Rear cover ( 1.1) [A]: Tray motor ( 1.6 PAPER STACK SENSOR B473R008.WMF Disconnect the LCT from the machine [A]: Sensor cover ( [B]: Paper stack sensor ( B473-5 06/09...
Page 886: Paper Size Adjustment
PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT September 2006 1.7 PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT B473R109.WMF The side fences [A] can be adjusted for A4 Sideways, B5 Sideways, or LT sideways at the top [B] and bottom brackets [C]. After changing the side fences to accept another paper size, you must execute SP5959 005 (Paper Type –...
Page 887: Details
September 2006 OVERVIEW 2. DETAILS 2.1 OVERVIEW 2.1.1 LCT MAIN COMPONENTS B473D001.WMF 1. Separation Roller 10. Paper Height Sensor 2 2. Transport Roller 11. Paper Tray 3. Feed Sensor 12. Paper Height Sensor 3 4. Feed Roller 13. Paper Tray Motor 5.
Page 888 OVERVIEW September 2006 Pick-up, Separation, Feed. Non-contact, maintenance free FRR sysem. ( Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods> Forward and Reverse Roller (FRR)) Tray Lift. Tray lift motor and timing belt raise and lower the paper tray. Paper Size Detection. The side fences cannot be adjusted by customers. The paper size must be entered with SP5959 005.
Page 889: Lct Drive Layout
September 2006 OVERVIEW 2.1.2 LCT DRIVE LAYOUT B473D003.WMF 1. Pick-up Roller 2. Separation Roller 3. Transport Rollers 4. Feed Roller 5. Feed Motor 6. Tray Motor 7. Tray Lift Shaft 8. Tray Drive Belt B473-9 06/09...
Page 890: Paper Feed And Separation
PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION September 2006 2.2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION A standard FRR system is used. It consists of the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers. 2.2.1 STARTING PAPER FEED B473D004.WMF The feed motor [A] drives the transport rollers [B]. The separation roller [C], which is free to rotate in the direction indicated by the arrow, remains at rest.
Page 891: Feed And Separation
September 2006 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION 2.2.2 FEED AND SEPARATION B473D005.WMF The feed motor [A] switches on, then the pick-up solenoid [B] switches on and transfers drive to the paper feed roller [C] and pick-up roller [D]. The rotating pick-up roller lowers and feeds the first sheet when it contacts the top of the stack.
Page 892: Paper Lift
PAPER LIFT September 2006 2.3 PAPER LIFT B473D006.WMF B473D158.WMF Tray motor [A] Gear [B] Shaft [C] Tray belts [D] raise and lower the paper tray [E]. After paper is set in the LCT and the upper cover is closed, if the paper height sensor [F] is not activated, the tray motor lowers the tray and stops.
Page 893 September 2006 PAPER LIFT B473D108.WMF Pressing the tray down button [A] reverses the rotation of the tray motor [B] and lowers the tray [C]. The tray lowers until the stack sensor [D] detects the top of the stack and stops the tray motor.
Page 894: Paper Height Detection
PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION September 2006 2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION B473D006.WMF As paper is consumed from the top of the stack [A], the paper tray rises and the actuator [B] attached to the tray passes through paper height sensor 3 [C], paper height sensor 2 [D], and paper height sensor 1 [E] until the actuator reaches the paper near end sensor [F].
Page 895: Paper End Detection
September 2006 PAPER END DETECTION 2.5 PAPER END DETECTION B473D111.WMF The paper end sensor [A] monitors the light reflected by each sheet on top of the stack. When the last sheet feeds, the cutout [B] is exposed, and the paper end sensor receives no reflected light from below because there is no paper and this signals paper end.
Page 896 PAPER END DETECTION September 2006 B473-16 06/09...
Page 897 2000/3000-SHEET FINISHER (Machine Code: B700/B701)
Page 898 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......... B700-1 1.1 BASIC PROCEDURES............... B700-1 1.1.1 COVERS..................B700-1 1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE ............. B700-2 1.2 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH ........ B700-4 1.3 POSITIONING ROLLER..............B700-5 1.4 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR ............B700-6 1.5 UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2 ..........
Page 899 2. DETAILS................B700-24 2.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................. B700-24 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ............B700-26 2.2.1 UPPER AREA B700/B701 ............B700-26 2.2.2 LOWER AREA B700/B701 ............B700-27 2.2.3 PUNCH UNIT B702 ..............B700-28 2.2.4 STACKER/STAPLER - B700/B701.......... B700-29 2.2.5 B700 FOLD UNIT..............B700-30 2.2.6 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .......
Page 900 Replacement and Adjustment Details For details about installation, preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, and specifications please refer to the Service Manual for e-STUDIO4500c/5500c. 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher B700 This finisher is equipped with three trays: a proof tray on top of the finisher, an upper (shift) tray, and a lower tray for booklets.
Page 902: Replacement And Adjustment
August 2006 BASIC PROCEDURES 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Be careful not to touch the sharp edge on the guide [A] indicated in the figure. 1.1 BASIC PROCEDURES 1.1.1 COVERS B700I209.MWF B700R101.WMF [A]: Small Upper Cover ( x1). Open the front door, remove the screw, then remove the cover.
Page 903: Upper Tray, End Fence
BASIC PROCEDURES August 2006 1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE B700R114.WMF 1. Remove the rear cover. ( 1.1.1) 2. To lower the upper tray: Support the tray [A] with your right hand. Pull gear [B] toward you to release. Slowly lower the tray until it stops.
Page 904 August 2006 BASIC PROCEDURES B700R115.WMF [A]: Front Side Cover ( [B]: Rear Side Cover ( [C]: Upper Tray ( [D]: Tray Bracket ( x1 shoulder screw [E]: End Fence ( B700R116.WMF B700-3...
Page 905 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, UPPER TRAY LIMIT SWITCH August 2006 1.2 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, UPPER TRAY LIMIT SWITCH B700R117.WMF B700R118.WMF Remove: Front door, front left side cover, rear cover, upper cover ( 1.1.1) End fence ( 1.1.2) [A]: Upper tray exit mechanism ( [B]: Upper tray limit sensor ( [C]: Upper tray limit switch ( B700-4...
Page 906: Positioning Roller
August 2006 POSITIONING ROLLER 1.3 POSITIONING ROLLER B700R103.WMF [A]: Open the front door. [B]: Pull out the stapler unit. [C]: Positioning roller ( x1, timing belt x1) B700-5...
Page 907: Proof Tray Exit Sensor
PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR August 2006 1.4 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR B700R107.WMF Remove small upper cover ( 1.1.1) [A]: Proof Tray Exit Sensor Bracket ( [B]: Proof Tray Exit Sensor (S10) ( B700-6...
Page 908 August 2006 UPPER TRAY PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2 1.5 UPPER TRAY PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2 B700R108.WMF Remove small upper cover, upper cover ( 1.1.1) [A]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor Bracket ( [B]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 1 – Staple Mode (S08) ( [C]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 2 –...
Page 909: Exit Guide Plate, Upper Tray Exit Sensor
EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR August 2006 1.6 EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR Remove: Rear cover ( 1.1.1) Upper covers ( 1.1.1) Front door ( 1.1.1) Cover ( 1.1.1) Paper exit cover ( 1.1.1) [A]: Inner cover ( B700R109.WMF [B]: Exit guide plate Link and spring...
Page 910: Proof Tray Full Sensor
August 2006 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR 1.7 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR B700R111.WMF Remove the exit guide plate. ( 1.6) [A]: Guide plate. Disconnect at [B]: Sensor bracket ( [C]: Proof tray full sensor (S11) ( B700-9...
Page 911: Finisher Entrance Sensor
FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR August 2006 1.8 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR B700R133.WMF Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier. Disconnect the cover interposer if it is installed. [A]: Sensor bracket ( [B]: Finisher entrance sensor (S1) ( B700-10...
Page 912: Pre-Stack Tray Exit Sensor
August 2006 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1.9 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR B700R102.WMF Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier. [A]: Sensor bracket [B]: Pre-stack tray exit sensor (S2) B700-11...
Page 913: Fold Unit Exit Sensor
FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR August 2006 1.10 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR Open the front door. Pull out the stapler tray. [A]: Fold unit vertical guide plate B700R121.WMF [B]: Fold unit inner cover x2, Spring pin x1) B700R125.WMF [C]: Fold unit upper cover ( [D]: Paper clamp mechanism ( [E]: Fold unit exit sensor bracket ( [F]: Fold unit exit sensor (S31) (...
Page 914: Fold Adjustments (B700 Only)
August 2006 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY) 1.11 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY) 1.11.1 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT B700R802.WMF Important The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even.
Page 915 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY) August 2006 B700R901.WMF 10. Push the stapler unit into the finisher and close the front door. 11. Do a folding test. Switch the copier on. Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF. On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling.
Page 916 August 2006 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY) B700R130A.WMF 15. Open the front door of the finisher and pull the stapler unit [A] out. 16. Open the guide plate [B]. 17. Turn the adjustment screw [C] to correct the amount of skew you measured from the test sheet.
Page 917: Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment
FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY) August 2006 1.11.2 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT Important The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even.
Page 918: Corner Stapler
August 2006 CORNER STAPLER 1.12 CORNER STAPLER B700R112.WMF B700R113.WMF Open the front door. Pull out the stapler unit [A]: Inner cover ( [B]: Stapler unit holder ( [C]: Corner stapler (M20) ( B700-17...
Page 919: Fold Unit
FOLD UNIT August 2006 1.13 FOLD UNIT B700R119.WMF B700R801.WMF Remove the back cover ( 1.1.1) Open the front door. CAUTION: The stapler unit is heavy. [A]: Ground screw ( [B]: Harness ( [C]: Stapler unit ( B700-18...
Page 920 August 2006 FOLD UNIT B700R124.WMF B700R134.WMF Important: Support the fold unit with your hand to prevent it from falling. CAUTION: The fold unit is heavy. [A]: Fold unit ( If you have replaced the fold unit: 1. Read the DIP SW settings on the decal [B] attached to the back of the new fold unit.
Page 921: Fold Unit Entrance Sensor
FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR August 2006 1.14 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR B700R132.WMF Pull out the stapler unit. [A]: Fold unit entrance sensor bracket ( [B]: Fold unit entrance sensor (S26) ( B700-20...
Page 922: Stack Present Sensor
August 2006 STACK PRESENT SENSOR 1.15 STACK PRESENT SENSOR B700R121.WMF B700R122.WMF Important: If you intend to correct the horizontal and vertical skew for the fold unit at the same time, do those adjustments first, then replace the sensor. ( 1.11.1, 1.11.2) Remove the stapler unit ( 1.13) [A]: Guide plate.
Page 923: Booklet Stapler, Booklet Stapler Motor
BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR August 2006 1.16 BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR 1.16.1 BOOKLET STAPLER B700R903.WMF Open the front door. Pull out the stapler unit. [A]: Harness cover ( [B]: Booklet stapler support stay ( [C]: Stapler ( B700-22...
Page 924: Booklet Stapler Motor
August 2006 BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR 1.16.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR Open the front door. Remove the stapler unit. ( 1.13) 1. Remove: [A]: Stay ( x4). [B]: Left plate ( x4). B700R122A.WMF 2. Remove: [C]: Harness cover ( [D]: Booklet stapler support stay [E]: Booklet stapler ( [F]: Booklet stapler motor ( To Reattach the Booklet Stapler Motor...
Page 925: Details
GENERAL LAYOUT August 2006 2. DETAILS 2.1 GENERAL LAYOUT B700D101.WMF 1. Proof Tray Junction Gate 7. Lower Tray (Booklet)* 2. Punch Unit 8. Folder Rollers* 3. Stapler Junction Gate 9. Folder Plate* 4. Pre-Stack Junction Gate 10. Booklet Stapler* 5. Pre-Stack Tray 11.
Page 926 August 2006 GENERAL LAYOUT Paper direction The operation of the proof tray and stapler junction gates direct the flow of the paper once it enters the finisher: Proof Junction Gate Stapler Junction Gate Paper Feeds Closed Closed Paper feeds straight through Open Closed Paper feeds to the proof tray...
Page 927: Electrical Components
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS August 2006 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 2.2.1 UPPER AREA B700/B701 B700D201.WMF Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4) 10. Upper Tray Limit Switch (SW2) Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL2) 11. Stacking Roller HP Sensor (S13) Upper Transport Motor (M2) 12. Stacking Sponge Roller Motor (M10) Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor (S7) 13.
Page 928: Lower Area B700/B701
August 2006 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 2.2.2 LOWER AREA B700/B701 B700D202.WMF Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21) Positioning Roller Motor (M14) Lower Transport Motor (M3) Lower Tray Full Sensor – Front (S34) Entrance Motor (M1) 10. Lower Tray Full Sensor – Rear (S33) Front Door Safety Switch (SW1) 11.
Page 929: Punch Unit B702
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS August 2006 2.2.3 PUNCH UNIT B702 B700D203A.WMF Punch Encoder Sensor (S24) Paper Position Slide HP Sensor (S22) Punch Drive Motor (M24) Paper Position Sensor (S3) Punch HP Sensor (S24) Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4) Punch Unit Board (PCB3) Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21) Paper position sensor slide motor (M7) 10.
Page 930: Stacker/Stapler - B700/B701
August 2006 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 2.2.4 STACKER/STAPLER - B700/B701 B700D204.WMF Corner Stapler Movement Motor (M6) Stack Present Sensor (S32) 10. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14) Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor (S27) 11. Corner Stapler (M20) Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16) 12.
Page 931: B700 Fold Unit
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS August 2006 2.2.5 B700 FOLD UNIT B700 only B700D205.WMF Clamp Roller HP Sensor (S25) Fold Cam HP Sensor (S30) Fold Roller Motor (M12) Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor (S28) Fold Plate Motor (M11) Fold Unit Entrance Sensor (S26) Fold Plate HP Sensor (S29) Clamp Roller Retraction Motor (M8) Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor (M16)
Page 932: Summary Of Electrical Components
August 2006 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 2.2.6 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Here is a general summary of all the electrical components of the B700/B701 finishers. NOTE: In the table below a number that appears in bold text (M8, etc.) denotes a component that is on the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B700 only. Component Function Boards (PCB)
Page 933 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS August 2006 Component Function Corner Stapler Rotation Swivels the corner stapler and positions it so the staple fires Motor at an oblique angle at the rear corner of the paper stack. Positioning Roller Motor Drives the positioning roller in the stapling tray. Jogger Fence Motor Drives the jogger fences in the stapling tray to jog both sides of the stack before stapling.
Page 934 August 2006 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Component Function paper output slot this sensor signals an error when it detects (1) paper has failed to leave the paper exit (lag error), (2) detects paper has failed to arrive at the paper exit (late error), (3) detects paper is in the exit slot when the machine is turned on.
Page 935 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS August 2006 Component Function the home position of the corner stapler. The corner stapler is in its home position when the actuator on the corner stapler unit interrupts this sensor. Stapler Rotation HP Controls the angle of the position of the corner stapler during Sensor oblique stapling.
Page 936 August 2006 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Component Function finally emerges from the nip of the fold rollers, detects the leading and trailing edge of the booklet to make sure that it feeds out correctly. Stack Present Sensor This sensor determines whether a there is paper at the turn junction gate when the machine is turned on.
Page 937: Drive Layout
DRIVE LAYOUT August 2006 2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT B700D206.WMF Upper Transport Motor (M2) Folder Plate Motor (M11) Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4) Positioning Roller Motor (M14) Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21) Lower Transport Motor (M3) Feed-Out Belt Motor (M5) Entrance Motor (M1) Fold Roller Motor* (M12) B700 Only...
Page 938: Junction Gates
August 2006 JUNCTION GATES 2.4 JUNCTION GATES The positions of the proof tray and staple tray junction gates determine the direction of paper feed after paper enters the finisher. Proof Mode [A]: Proof tray junction gate opens. [B]: Staple tray junction gate remains closed.
Page 939: Pre-Stacking
PRE-STACKING August 2006 2.5 PRE-STACKING B700D992.WMF This example describes what happens to Set 2 during the feed and stapling cycle of sets that contain three pages. [A]: While the Set 1 is being stapled in the staple tray [1], the 1st sheet of Set 2 [2] feeds to the pre-stack tray, and the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [3] enters the finisher.
Page 940 August 2006 PRE-STACKING [11] [12] [10] B700D993.WMF [E]: The 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 [9] switch back together into the top of the pre-stack and wait for the 3rd of Set 2 sheet to arrive. [F]: The stapling of Set 1 in the staple tray [10] is completed. [G]: Set 1 [11] exits the staple tray.
Page 941: Upper Tray
UPPER TRAY August 2006 2.6 UPPER TRAY B700D108.WMF [A]: Upper Tray Lift Motor [B]: Upper Feeler [C]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 1 (Staple Mode) [D]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 2 (Non-Staple Mode) [E]: Lower Feeler [F]: Upper Tray Limit Sensor [G]: Upper Tray Limit Switch [H]: Upper Tray Full Sensors Important...
Page 942 August 2006 UPPER TRAY Five sensors and one switch control the operation of the upper tray lift motor [A]. Upper Tray Raising and Lowering Operation Mode Sensors, Switch Action Standby Stops the lift motor is at the standby position (Non-Staple Mode) when the actuator of the upper feeler deactivates sensor [C] (when it is between sensors [C] and [D]).
Page 943: Lower Tray (B700 Only)
LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY) August 2006 2.7 LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY) Full 1 Ready Full 2 Full 3 B700D358.WMF The lower tray sensor actuator arm [A] rests on the top of the stack of stapled booklets as they are output to the lower tray. A flap depressor [B] keeps the open ends of the booklets down.
Page 944 August 2006 LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY) The tray full detection depends on the size of the paper and the number of sheets in one stapled and folded booklet. Full 2 Full 3: See the In the table below, the conditions ( Ready Full 1, illustration on the previous page) refer to the states of the sensors described on the...
Page 945: Corner Stapling
CORNER STAPLING August 2006 2.8 CORNER STAPLING 2.8.1 STACKING AND JOGGING B700D102.WMF [A]: Jogger Fence Motor (M15) [B]: Jogger Fences [C]: Positioning Roller [D]: Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15) [E]: Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid (SOL4) [F]: Pressure Plate B700-44...
Page 946 August 2006 CORNER STAPLING At the beginning of the job, the jogger fence motor (M15) [A] switches on and moves the jogger fences [B] to the standby position (7.5 mm from the sides of the selected paper size). When each sheet passes the pre-stack tray exit sensor (S2) and enters the stapling tray: The jogger fence motor switches on and moves the jogger fences to within 5.5 mm of the sides of the selected paper size.
Page 947: Stapler Movement
CORNER STAPLING August 2006 2.8.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT B700D103.WMF [A]: Stapler Movement Motor [B]: Stapler [C]: Stapler Rotation Motor B700-46...
Page 948 August 2006 CORNER STAPLING The stapler performs horizontal and rotational movement in each of the four staple modes: Front 1 staple Rear 1 staple Rear diagonal staple Rear/Front 2 staples. The stapler movement motor [A] drives a timing belt that moves stapler [B] left and right on its stainless steel rail.
Page 949: Corner Stapling
CORNER STAPLING August 2006 2.8.3 CORNER STAPLING B468D015.WMF B700D304.WMF Staple firing is driven by the stapler motor [A] inside the stapler unit. The stapler hammer [B] fires the stapler [C]. The cartridge set sensor [D] detects the cartridge at the correct position. The staple end sensor [E] detects the staple end condition.
Page 950: Booklet Stapling (B700 Only)
August 2006 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) 2.9 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) 2.9.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM B700D305.WMF [A]: Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid (SOL5) [B]: Booklet Pressure Roller Arm [C]: Booklet Pressure Roller As soon as the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and the jogger fences, the stack feed out belt moves.
Page 951: Booklet Stapling (B700 Only)
BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) August 2006 2.9.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING Overview B700D910.BMP Leading Edge Pressure Roller 13. Corner Stapler (M20) Stack Present Sensor (S32) 14. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14) Feed Out Belt Pawl 1 15. Feed Out Belt Booklet Staplers x2 (M22, M23) 16.
Page 952 August 2006 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) B700D912.BMP The last sheet of the stack [1] enters the stapling tray. The jogger fences [2] jog the last sheet into position (based on the width of the selected paper size) and then retract and stop 1 mm away from the sides of the stack. The pressure plate [3] and booklet pressure roller [4] press down on the sheet.
Page 953 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) August 2006 [12] [14] [11] [10] [13] B700D913.BMP The jogger fences remain 1 mm away from the sides of the stack. The feed out belt [1] raises the stack until the top of the stack is 10 mm past the leading edge pressure roller [2] and stops.
Page 954 August 2006 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) B700D914.BMP The bottom fence [1] raises the stack to the prescribed fold position [2]. The fold plate [3] moves to the left and advances 1/3 its maximum horizontal stroke and exerts 20 kg (44 lb.) of pressure at the fold rollers [4]. With the fold plate pushing the stack into nip of the fold rollers [5], the fold rollers begin to rotate and fold the stack as it feeds out.
Page 955 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) August 2006 B700D915.BMP When the fold rollers [1] feed the stack 10 mm past the nip, the fold plate retracts until it no longer touches the stack. The fold unit exit sensor [2] detects the folded edge of the stack and stops the fold rollers.
Page 956 August 2006 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) B700D916.BMP With the feed of the stack halted, the fold plate [1] retracts. The fold plate HP sensor (not shown) detects the fold plate and stops it at its home position. The fold rollers [2] and fold unit exit rollers [3] begin to rotate together and feed out the folded booklet to the lower tray.
Page 957: Booklet Stapling And Folding Mechanisms
BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) August 2006 Booklet Stapling and Folding Mechanisms B700D104.WMF Booklet Stapler [A]: Feed Out Belt Pawl. Raises the stack to stapling position. [B]: Booklet Stapler – Rear [C]: Booklet Stapler – Front Stack Junction Gate [D]: Stack Junction Gate Motor. Drives a timing belt and stack junction gate cam. [E]: Stack Junction Gate Cam.
Page 958 August 2006 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) B700D105.WMF Clamp Roller [A]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives the stationary clamp drive roller as well as the fold rollers (see next page). [B]: Clamp Rollers. Clamp Roller – Drive. Rotated by the fold roller motor, this stationary roller feeds the stack down with the retracting roller closed.
Page 959 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) August 2006 B700D106.WMF Fold Plate B700D107.WMF [A]: Bottom Fence Stack Stoppers. Catches the stack after it is released by the clamp rollers. [B]: Fold Plate Motor. Drives the timing belt and gears that move the fold plate. [C]: Fold Plate Cam.
Page 960: Upper Tray Output
August 2006 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT 2.10 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT 2.10.1 FEED OUT B700D109.WMF B700D110.WMF [A]: Feed Out Belt Motor [B]: Stack Feed-Out Belt [C]: Pawl [D]: Exit Rollers [E]: Exit Guide Plate Motor [F]: Exit Guide Plate [G]: Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor [H]: Upper Tray B700-59...
Page 961 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT August 2006 After the stack is stapled, the feed out belt motor [A] switches on and drives the feed out belt [B]. The a pawl [C] attached to the feed out belt catches on the stack and lifts the stack toward the feed out slot.
Page 962: Feed Out Stacking
August 2006 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT 2.10.2 FEED OUT STACKING B700D359.WMF Upper/proof exit motor [A] drives feed roller [B] and stacking sponge roller [C]. Stacking sponge roller motor [D] moves the sponge roller forward and back with link [E]. The position of the stacking sponge roller [C] is controlled by the stacking sponge roller motor which is switched on and off by the stacking roller HP sensor [F].
Page 963: Punch Unit B702 (For B700/B701)
PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) August 2006 2.11 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) 2.11.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION B700D351.WMF Skew Correction Before Punching This punch unit corrects for paper skew and then positions the punch unit to punch holes at the correct position. Each sheet is punched one at a time. Paper feeds out of the copier.
Page 964 August 2006 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) B700D352.WMF Punch Unit Position Correction These operations (skew correction before punching, and punch unit position correction) increase the accuracy of the punch alignment. The trailing edge of the sheet passes the finisher entrance sensor [A]. The paper position slide unit [B] moves the paper position sensor [C] forward to the edge of the paper.
Page 965 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) August 2006 SP6102 SP6101 B700D360.WMF These SP codes adjust the punch hole alignment: SP6101 Adjusts the punch positions in the direction of paper feed. SP6102 Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed. For more, see Section "5.
Page 966: Punch Mechanisms
August 2006 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) 2.11.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS Paper Position Detection B700D353.WMF [A]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1) [B]: Finisher Entrance Roller [C]: Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1) [D]: Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor (M7) [E]: Paper Position Sensor (S27) [F]: Paper Position Sensor Slide HP Sensor (S22) The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the finisher entrance rollers [B] that feed paper from the copier into the finisher.
Page 967: Punch Unit Movement
PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) August 2006 Punch Unit Movement B700D354.WMF [A]: Punch Movement Motor (M9) [B]: Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21) [C]: Punch Drive Motor (M24) The punch movement motor (M9) [A] extends and retracts the punch unit to position it at the correct position for punching.
Page 968: Punch Selection And Firing
August 2006 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) Punch Selection and Firing [A]: Punch Drive Motor (M24) [B]: Punch Encoder Wheel [C]: Punch Encoder Sensor (S24) [D]: Punch HP Sensor (S23) The punch drive motor (M24) [A] turns the small, notched encoder wheel [B] through the gap in the punch encoder sensor [C] (S24).
Page 969: Punch Hopper Mechanism
PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) August 2006 2.11.3 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM B700D357.WMF [A]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1) [B]: Punch Waste Belt [C]: Punch Waste Hopper [D]: Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4) The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the timing belt and gears that rotate the punch waste belt [B].
Page 970: Finisher Jam Detection
August 2006 FINISHER JAM DETECTION 2.12 FINISHER JAM DETECTION B700D996.WMF Display Mode What It Means Finisher After main machine exit sensor goes OFF, entrance finisher entrance sensor does not go ON even Proof sensor late after enough time to feed 450 mm. R1 to R3 Shift Finisher...
Page 971 FINISHER JAM DETECTION August 2006 Display Mode What It Means Pre-stack tray After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, pre- exit sensor lag stack tray exit sensor does not go ON even after enough time to feed 650 mm. R5 to R7 Staple Pre-stack tray After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, pre-...
Page 972 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (Machine Code: B704) 06/09...
Page 973 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......... B704-1 1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS................. B704-1 1.2 FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER ..........B704-2 1.3 FEED BELT ..................B704-3 1.4 GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT ............B704-4 1.5 MAIN BOARD ..................B704-5 1.6 MOTOR REPLACEMENT..............B704-6 1.16.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR ..........
Page 974: Replacement And Adjustment
September 2006 EXTERNAL COVERS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS B470R001.WMF [A]: Open the feed cover. [B]: Upper front cover ( x 2) NOTE: To remove the upper front cover, screw [C] must be removed. [D]: Rear upper cover ( x 2) [E]: Slip sheet tray ( x 2,...
Page 975: Feed Unit And Pick-Up Roller
FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER September 2006 1.2 FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER B470R002.WMF B470R003.WMF Open the feed cover. [A]: Feed unit The unit is spring loaded. Push it to the right to release it, then lift it out. [B]: Pick-up roller ( x 2, bushings x 2) B704-2 06/09...
Page 976: Feed Belt
September 2006 FEED BELT 1.3 FEED BELT B470R004.WMF B470R005.WMF Feed unit ( 1.2) [A]: Pick-up roller unit. Pull the unit away from the bushings in the direction of the arrow. [B]: Feed belt holder Hold the feed belt holder by the sides, then lift up to separate from the holder.
Page 977: Guide Plate Adjustment
GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT September 2006 1.4 GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT B470R151.WMF Adjust the guide plate if the holes punched in the covers or slip sheets are not correctly aligned with holes punched in the other sheets. 1. Open the feed cover. 2.
Page 978: Main Board
September 2006 MAIN BOARD 1.5 MAIN BOARD B470R101.WMF Open the top cover. Rear cover ( x 1) [A]: Main board ( x 9, x 4) NOTE: All DIP switch settings on the main board of the cover sheet unit should be set to OFF.
Page 979: Motor Replacement
MOTOR REPLACEMENT September 2006 1.6 MOTOR REPLACEMENT 1.6.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR B470R102.WMF Open the top cover. Rear middle cover ( x 1) ( 1.1) [A]: Motor bracket ( x 1, harness x 1, x 2, timing belt x 1) [B]: Motor ( x 2) 1.6.2 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR B470R104.WMF...
Page 980: Feed Motor, Transport Motor
September 2006 MOTOR REPLACEMENT 1.6.3 FEED MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR B470R105.WMF B470R103.WMF Rear upper cover ( 1.1) NOTE: When removing the feed gear and transport gear, hold one hand under the gear to catch the pin as it falls from the hole in the shaft. [A]: Feed gear ( x 1, pin x 1, timing belt x 1, bushing x 1) [B]: Transport gear (...
Page 981: Main Layout
OVERVIEW September 2006 2. DETAILS 2.1 OVERVIEW 2.1.1 MAIN LAYOUT B470D001.WMF 1. Support tray 2. Slip sheet tray 3. Pick-up roller 4. Feed belt 5. Separation roller 6. Grip roller B704-8 06/09...
Page 982: Vertical Transport Motor
September 2006 OVERVIEW 2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT B470D003.WMF 1. Pick-up Roller 2. Feed Belt 3. Bottom Plate Lift Motor 4. Feed Motor 5. Transport Motor 6. Timing Belt 7. Vertical Transport Motor B704-9 06/09...
Page 983: Paper Size Detection
OVERVIEW September 2006 2.1.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION The width sensors [A] (S1, S2, S3) and length sensors [B] (S4, S5, S6) detect the width and length of the original on the interposer feed tray. DLT SEF A3 SEF 8 K SEF B4 SEF 10"x14"...
Page 984 September 2006 OVERVIEW The table below lists the sensor output for each paper size. A4 SEF A4 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF 11" x 17" 10" x 14" SEF " x 14" " x 13" " x 11" 11"...
Page 985 OVERVIEW September 2006 B064 series: Paper Size Detection North America Execute SP5959 006 and enter the correct number for the size of the paper loaded for feeding from the cover interposer tray. To Select for Loaded Display (Default) Enter Display "...
Page 986: Paper Path
September 2006 OVERVIEW 2.1.4 PAPER PATH B470D006.WMF 1. Pick-up Roller 2. Feed Belt 3. Separation Roller 4. Grip Roller 5. Transport Roller 1 6. Transport Roller 2 The paper feeds from the tray, to the feed belt, then to the grip roller and down into the paper path to the finisher below.
Page 987: Paper Feed
PAPER FEED September 2006 2.2 PAPER FEED B470D005.WMF Power On When paper is placed on the tray, the paper set sensor [A] in the tray actuates and switches on the bottom plate lift motor [B]. The top of the stack raises the pick-up roller unit until the actuator on this unit actuates the pick-up roller position sensor [C] and switches the motor off.
Page 988: Sheet Finisher
3000-SHEET FINISHER (Machine Code: B706) 06/09...
Page 989 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......... B706-1 2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ..........B706-2 3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......... B706-3 3.1 DOOR AND COVER REPLACEMENT..........B706-3 Front Door..................B706-3 Left Inner Cover ................B706-3 Inner Cover ..................B706-3 Side Table and Upper Tray ............B706-4 Left Covers..................
Page 990 3.8.4 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR ........B706-26 3.9 PUNCH UNIT (B531)................ B706-27 3.9.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT ......... B706-27 Front to Rear Adjustment ............. B706-27 Right to Left Adjustment............... B706-27 3.10 JOGGER UNIT (B513) ..............B706-28 3.10.1 JOGGER UNIT ..............B706-28 3.10.2 JOGGER UNIT PCB ..............
Page 992 September 2006 Installation 1. INSTALLATION For details about installing the 3000 Sheet Finisher B706, please refer to the instructions you received with the instructions or the “1. Installation” in the main machine service manual. B706-1 06/09...
Page 993: Preventive Maintenance
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE September 2006 2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE For details about the 3000 Sheet Finisher B706 PM table, please refer to Section “2. Preventive Maintenance” in the main Service Manual. B706-2 06/09...
Page 994: Replacement And Adjustment
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.1 DOOR AND COVER REPLACEMENT B478R502.WMF B478R505.WMF Front Door 1. Remove the front door screw [A] ( x 1). 2. Remove the front door [B]. Left Inner Cover 1. Remove the front door. 2.
Page 995: Side Table And Upper Tray
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 Side Table and Upper Tray B478R503.WMF 1. Remove the side table [A] ( x 2). Slide to the right to remove it. 2. Click the release lever [B] and remove the upper tray [C]. B706-4 06/09...
Page 996: Left Covers
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment B478R504.WMF B478R501.WMF Left Covers 1. Remove the left upper panel [A]. 2. Remove the left upper cover [B] ( x 2, x 2). 3. Remove the door and left inner cover. (See “Front Door and Left Inner Cover Replacement”.) 4.
Page 997: Rollers
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.2 ROLLERS 3.2.1 SHIFT POSITIONING ROLLER B478R522.WMF 1. Above the shift tray, pull the roller mount [A] out. 2. Remove the rollers [B] and [C] ( x 1 each) B706-6 06/09...
Page 998: Positioning Roller
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER B478R506.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the snap ring [A]. 3. Release the rubber belt [B]. 4. Replace the positioning roller [C]. B706-7 06/09...
Page 999: Alignment Brush Roller
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.2.3 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER B478R507.WMF B478R508.WMF 1. Open the front door and pull out the staple unit. 2. Remove the rear cover. 3. Remove the main board and all connectors ( x 8). 4. Remove the screw [A] and tension spring [B] for the tension bracket [C], and release the tension of the timing belt.
Page 1000: Stack Feed-Out Belt
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3.3 STACK FEED-OUT BELT [B] [C] B478R523.WMF B478R524.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Pull out the jogger and stapler unit. 3. Remove the inner cover [A] ( x 2). 4. Remove the sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1, clamp x 1).
Page 1001: Jogger Fence
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.4 JOGGER FENCE B478R525.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Pull out the jogger and stapler unit. 3. Push both fences to the center. 4. Remove the left jogger fence [A] ( x 1) 5. Remove the right jogger fence [B] ( x 1).
Page 1002: Sensors
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3.5 SENSORS 3.5.1 STACK HEIGHT 1, 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR B478R509.WMF Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2 1. Remove the top cover. ( 3.71) 2. Remove the left upper panel and left upper cover ( x 2, x 2).
Page 1003: Upper Tray Paper Limit And Exit Sensor
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 3.5.2 UPPER TRAY PAPER LIMIT AND EXIT SENSOR B478R510.WMF Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor 1. Remove the top cover. 2. Remove the sensor cover [A] ( x 2). 3. Remove the sensor bracket [B] ( x 1).
Page 1004: Shift Tray Exit Sensor
September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment 3.5.3 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR B478R511.WMF B478R512.WMF 1. Remove the top cover. 2. Open the front door. 3. Remove the inner cover. 4. Release the upper exit guide springs [A] (x 2). 5. Disconnect the link [B] from the cam ( x 1).

This manual is also suitable for:

E-studio5500c E-studio 4500c E-studio 5500c

Toshiba e-STUDIO4500c Service Manual

Table of Contents

Replacement and Adjustment/Preventive Maintenance

Installation

Replacement and Adjustment

Appendix

Appendix

Details

Detailed Descriptions

Replacement and Adjustment

Instrallation

Quick Links

SERVICE MANUAL

Chapters

Troubleshooting

Related Manuals for Toshiba e-STUDIO4500c

Summary of Contents for Toshiba e-STUDIO4500c